Yamaha RX-V1600 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V1600

Categoría: Receptor

Tipo: Manual de usuario

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V1600

Printed in Malaysia WF99900

RX-V1600

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V1600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 26, 2005 4:34 PM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may

cause the product and cart combination to

overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it

outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main

room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power

plug from the AC wall outlet.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is

often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,

it is not disconnected from the AC power source even

if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS

Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la

plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de

la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à

la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 4

Handling the remote control ...................................... 5

Opening and closing the front panel door.................. 5

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 6

Front panel ................................................................. 6

Remote control........................................................... 8

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................. 10

Front panel display .................................................. 11

Rear panel ................................................................ 13

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 14

Before connecting speakers ..................................... 14

Connecting speakers ................................................ 15

Using bi-wire and bi-AMP connections .................. 19

Information on cables and jacks

used for connections ............................................ 20

Connecting HDMI components ............................... 23

Connecting video components................................. 24

Connecting audio components................................. 27

Connecting the antennas .......................................... 29

Connecting the power cable..................................... 30

Turning on and off this unit ..................................... 30

Setting the speaker impedance................................. 31

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32

Introduction.............................................................. 32

Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 32

Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 33

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 36

Basic operations....................................................... 36

Additional operations............................................... 38

RECORDING ....................................................... 45

FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 46

Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46

Manual tuning .......................................................... 47

Automatic preset tuning........................................... 47

Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49

Selecting preset stations........................................... 50

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ............... 52

What is XM Satellite Radio? ................................... 52

XM Satellite Radio connections .............................. 52

XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 53

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 54

Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode................... 55

Using XM Satellite Radio search modes ................. 56

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 59

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information .......................................................... 60

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......62

What is a sound field? ............................................. 62

Changing parameter settings ................................... 62

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS ...............................................64

For movie/video sources.......................................... 64

For music sources .................................................... 66

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS ...............................................67

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

SPEAKER LAYOUTS......................................71

MANUAL SETUP .................................................75

Using MANUAL SETUP........................................ 77

Using BASIC MENU .............................................. 78

Using SOUND MENU ............................................ 81

Using INPUT MENU .............................................. 83

Using OPTION MENU ........................................... 85

ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................89

Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 89

Adjusting speaker levels .......................................... 89

ADVANCED SETUP ............................................90

Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................... 90

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................92

Control area ............................................................. 92

Controlling each component.................................... 93

Setting remote control codes ................................... 94

Using LEARN ......................................................... 96

Using RE-NAME .................................................... 98

Using MACRO ........................................................ 99

Using CLEAR........................................................ 101

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 .................................................104

Connecting the Zone 2 and

Zone 3 components ........................................... 104

Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3.................................... 105

Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3.............................. 106

Using the control mode of

Zone 2 and Zone 3............................................. 107

HDMI ...................................................................108

What is HDMI? ..................................................... 108

Setting the HDMI parameters................................ 109

Basic HDMI operations ......................................... 109

TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................110

GLOSSARY .........................................................117

Audio information ................................................. 117

Video information.................................................. 119

Sound field program information .......................... 119

Parametric equalizer information .......................... 120

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................121

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FEATURES

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS Output Power

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)

Front: 120 W + 120 W

Center: 120 W

Surround: 120 W + 120 W

Surround Back: 120 W + 120 W

Sound field features

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

◆ THX Select2

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1,

DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic x decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or

high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital

audio

◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion

(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video →

HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out

Other features

◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to

optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video

system

◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete

multi-channel input

◆ Short message function

◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and

PCM sources

◆ S-video input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ Analog video I/P conversion from 480i to 480p

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening mode

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and

learning/macro capability

◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc.

In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be

trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

FEATURES

GETTING STARTED

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

STRAIGHT

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

Remote control

Batteries (x6)

(AAA, R03)

AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphone

Speaker terminal

wrench

Power cable

Indoor FM antenna

TUNER

CD-R

DTV

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

8 9

POWER

STANDBY

–

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

CAT.

A/B/C/D/E

MUTE

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3ZONE 2

ID2ID1

PRESET

DISPLAY

ENT

DVD

V-AU X

PHONO

ALL

NUMBER

Zone 2/Zone 3

remote control

GETTING STARTED

• Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not

flash, or its light or display window become dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these

different types of batteries may have the same shape and color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

■ Installing batteries

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert four supplied batteries

(AAA, R03) according to the polarity

markings on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert two supplied batteries (AAA, R03)

according to the polarity markings (+ and –)

on the inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

Installing batteries in the remote controls

Notes

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the remote control code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

GETTING STARTED

INTRODUCTION

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove

– extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the

panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls.

Handling the remote control

Notes

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

30 30

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

ON SCREEN

SET MENU

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

XM MEMORY

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERS

PRESET/CH

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

Opening and closing the front panel door

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

The XM Satellite Radio controls (SEARCH MODE, CATEGORY, PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, MEMORY and DISPLAY) are only

applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when XM is selected as the input source. For details, see “Front panel

functions” on page 53.

1 MASTER ON/OFF

Press inward to the ON position.

• Turns on this unit.

• Turns on the main room.

• Sets Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode.

Press again to release it outward to the OFF position.

• Turns off this unit.

• Turns off the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3.

See page 30 for details.

2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF

Turns on this unit only or sets it to the standby mode.

In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small quantity of

power.

• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 6 to 7 second delay

before this unit can reproduce sound.

• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is

pressed inward to the ON position.

3 INPUT selector

Selects the desired input source.

4 AUDIO SELECT

Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack

between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when

one component is connected to two or more input jacks on

the rear panel (see page 43).

5 MULTI CH INPUT

Selects the input source connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT

source takes priority over the input source selected with

the INPUT selector (or the input selector buttons on the

remote control).

6 A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when

TUNER is selected as the input source (see page 50).

7 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

Selects the preset station number (1 to 8) when TUNER is

selected as the input source and the colon (:) is displayed

next to the band indication in the front panel display.

Selects the tuning frequency when TUNER is selected as

the input source and the colon (:) is not displayed in the

front panel display.

See pages 46 to 51 for details.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

Note

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

ILMKJHG

21 3 45 6 7 8 90AB C E FD

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

8 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

9 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when

TUNER is selected as the input source (see pages 46 to

51).

0 FM/AM

Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when TUNER is

selected as the input source (see page 46).

The frequency of the previously received station is automatically

recalled.

A MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory when TUNER is selected

as the input source. Hold down for more than 3 seconds to

start automatic preset tuning (see page 47).

B TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L), DISPLAY

Switches the tuning mode between automatic (the AUTO

indicator is turned on) and manual (the AUTO indicator is

turned off) when TUNER is selected as the input source.

C STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Turns the sound field programs on or off. When

STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input

signals are output directly from the respective speakers

without effect processing.

D Remote control sensor

Receives infrared signals from the remote control.

E TONE CONTROL

Use to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front

left and right and center channels (see page 38).

F PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 41).

The indicator around the button lights up when the unit is in the

PURE DIRECT mode.

G OPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied optimizer microphone to run

AUTO SETUP (see page 32).

H SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each

time the corresponding button is pressed.

I PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones.

• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the

PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.

• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to 2-

channel stereo (front left and right channels).

J VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from an external source such

as a game console. To reproduce source signals at these

jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.

K MULTI ZONE buttons

ZONE 2 ON/OFF

Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode.

See page 30 for details.

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is

pressed inward to the ON position.

ZONE 3 ON/OFF

Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode.

See page 30 for details.

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is

pressed inward to the ON position.

ZONE CONTROL

Switches the zone you want to control between the

main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 106).

After you press ZONE CONTROL, the indicator for

the currently selected zone flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 5 seconds. While the

indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation.

L PROGRAM selector

Use to select sound field programs or adjust the balance of

bass and treble in conjunction with TONE CONTROL.

M VOLUME

Controls the volume level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.

Note

Notes

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. Set AMP/

SOURCE/TV to AMP to operate this unit. To operate

other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL

FEATURES” on page 92.

The XM Satellite Radio controls (XM, XM MEMORY, SRCH

MODE, DISPLAY, cursor buttons k / n / l / h, numeric

buttons and ENT.) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and

are operational only when XM is selected as the input source. For

details, see “Remote control functions” on page 53.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 Transmission indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared

signals.

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press

TUNER to select TUNER as the input source.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM

to select XM as the input source.

4 Display window

Shows the name of the selected input source that you can

control.

5 LEVEL, BAND

Selects the speaker you want to adjust the speaker output

level for when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP

(see pages 89).

Switches the reception band between FM and AM when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is

selected as the input source.

6 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER

Selects and adjusts the DSP program parameters or OSD

menu items when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.

Press l / h to select a preset station group (A to E) and

k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is

selected as the input source.

7 RETURN

Returns to the upper or the previous directory in the OSD

menu.

8 Sound field program / numeric buttons

Select sound field programs when AMP/SOURCE/TV is

set to AMP.

Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in the multi-

channel format (see page 40).

Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1

channel playback of multi-channel software (see page 39).

Use numbers 1 to 8 to select preset stations when AMP/

SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is selected

as the input source.

9 MACRO ON/OFF

Turns on or off the macro function (see page 100).

0 MACRO

Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a

single button (see page 99).

Remote control

Note

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

FREQ/TEXT

EON STARTMODE PTY SEEK

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

(U.S.A. model)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

A STANDBY

Sets this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode (see

page 30).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

B POWER

Turns on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 30).

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

C AUDIO SEL

Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack

between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when

one component is connected to two or more input jacks on

the rear panel (see page 43).

D SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

E MULTI CH IN

Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external

decoder, etc.

F SELECT k / n

Selects another input source that you can control

independently of the input source selected with the input

selector buttons.

G VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

H AMP/SOURCE/TV

Selects the component you want to control with the

remote control.

AMP

Set to this position to operate this unit.

SOURCE

Set to this position to operate the component selected with

an input selector button.

Set to this position to operate the television assigned to

either DTV or PHONO.

If televisions are assigned to both DTV and PHONO, the one

assigned to DTV takes priority and gets operated when AMP/

SOURCE/TV is set to TV.

To set the remote control codes for other components, see

page 94.

I MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level.

J PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 41).

K SET MENU

Enters or exits the SET MENU mode.

L NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 41).

M ON SCREEN

Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD)

that appears on your monitor (see page 89).

N STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound field programs off or on. When

STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input

signals are output directly from their respective speakers

without effect processing.

O SPEAKERS A/B

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each

time the corresponding button is pressed.

P RE-NAME

Changes the name of the input source in the display

window (see page 98).

Q CLEAR

Clears remote control codes or functions acquired from

the learn, macro and rename features (see page 101).

R LEARN

Programs remote control codes or functions from other

remote controls (see page 96).

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the function of each control on the

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control Zone 2 or

Zone 3.

The XM Satellite Radio controls (XM, DISPLAY, PRESET,

ALL, CAT., numeric buttons, NUMBER, cursor buttons

k / n / l / h and ENT) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model

and are operational only when XM is selected as the input source.

For details, see “Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control functions” on

page 54.

1 Input selector buttons

Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 and

change the control area.

2 PRESET +/–

Selects the preset station number (1 to 8) when TUNER is

selected as the input source or Zone 2 or Zone 3.

3 A/B/C/D/E

Selects the preset station group (A to E) when TUNER is

selected as the input source or Zone 2 or Zone 3.

4 ID1/ID2 switch

Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2

(see page 95).

5 POWER

Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

6 STANDBY

Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.

This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the

front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.

7 VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level or Zone 2 or

Zone 3.

8 MUTE

Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3.

Press again to restore the audio output to the previous

volume level.

9 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch

Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that

of Zone 3.

Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control

Note

TUNER

CD-R

DTV

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

8 9

POWER

STANDBY

–

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

CAT.

A/B/C/D/E

MUTE

PRESET

VOLUME

ZONE 3ZONE 2

ID2ID1

PRESET

DISPLAY

ENT

DVD

V-AU X

PHONO

ALL

NUMBER

3 8

(U.S.A. model)

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. model.

1 YPAO indicator

Lights up when the AUTO SETUP procedure is in

progress and when the AUTO SETUP speaker settings are

used without any modifications.

2 HDMI indicator

Lights up when HDMI components are assigned to HDMI

IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks and they are recognized by this

unit (see page 83).

Turns off when no HDMI component is assigned to the

either HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack or when no HDMI

component is recognized by this unit although they are

assigned to the HDMI IN jacks (see page 83).

See page 108 for details.

3 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

4 Decoder indicators

When any of the decoders of this unit operate, the

respective indicator lights up.

5 Input source indicators

Light up when the corresponding input source is selected.

6 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

7 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on.

8 AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

9 STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

0 TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

A MEMORY indicator

Flashes to indicate that a station can be stored.

B Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

C SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 38).

D SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of front speakers

are selected or when bi-wiring.

E VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active

(see page 43).

F Sound field indicators

Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

G HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program.

H PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

I DSD indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (direct

stream digital) digital audio signals.

J Multi-information display

Shows the name of the current sound field program and

other information when adjusting or changing settings.

Front panel display

Note

MATRIX

DISCRETE

VIRTUAL

CINEMA

SILENT

SLEEP

NIGHT

ZONE3

ZONE2

STEREO

AUTO

TUNED

MEMORY

HiFi DSP

YPAO

V-AUX

A B

MUTE

VOLUME

LFE

96/24

LL C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

PCM

DSD

PL x

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

123 4 5 6 7 890A

PONMLKJHGFEDCB

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field

Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround/surround back DSP sound field

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

K 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

L LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.

M Input channel and speaker indicators

Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Light up according to the number of presence and

surround back speakers set for PRESENCE SP

(see page 79) and SB L/R SP (see page 79) in

MANUAL SETUP when TEST TONE in MANUAL

SETUP is set to ON (see page 81).

You can make settings for the presence and surround back

speakers automatically by running AUTO SETUP

(see page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for

PRESENCE SP (see page 79) and SB L/R SP (see page 79)

in MANUAL SETUP.

N NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select a night listening mode.

O SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators

Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on.

LL C R

SL SB SR

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

See pages 24, 25 and 27 for connection information.

2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See pages 24, 25 and 27 for details.

3 Video component jacks

See pages 24 and 25 for connection information.

4 Audio component jacks

See pages 24, 25 and 27 for connection information.

5 CONTROL OUT jacks

These are control expansion terminals for factory use only.

6 WRENCH HOLDER

Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when

not in use (see page 16).

7 Antenna terminals

See page 29 for connection information.

8 AC OUTLETS

Use to supply power to your other A/V components

(see page 30).

9 AC IN

Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable

(see page 30).

0 XM jack (U.S.A. model only)

See page 52 for connection information.

A HDMI IN/OUT connectors

See page 108 for connection information.

B RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.

Consult you dealer for details.

C ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks

See page 104 for details.

D MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 26 for connection information.

E PRE OUT jacks

See page 28 for connection information.

F REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

See page 104 for details.

G Speaker terminals

See page 15 for connection information.

H PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals

See page 17 for connection information.

Rear panel

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

SURROUND BACK

SINGLE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

MONITOR OUT

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

VIDEO

OUT

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

ZONE

CENTERSUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

OUTPUT

AUDIO

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

SURROUND

TUNER

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

AM ANT

GND

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

CD DVD

COAXIAL

–

––

–

RS-232C

HDMIXM

DVR/

VCR 2

CONTROL OUT

REMOTE

GND

WRENCH

HOLDER

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

PBY

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

+12V 15mA MAX.

PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

ZONE

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

100W MAX.TOTAL

SWITCHED

12 3 4 56 7 8 9

HGFEDCBA0

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R

speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP,

multi-channel audio sources and THX.

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union).

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the

listening position and at the same height as the surround

speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)

apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width

as the front speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

Presence speakers (PR and PL)

Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA

DSP (see page 64). These effects include sounds that

filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the

screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place

these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m

(1 – 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly

inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers

using the PRIORITY parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see

page 79).

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting speakers

More than 30 cm (12 in)

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

Note

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Di-pole speaker layout

Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used

for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please

place the surround and surround back speakers according

to the speaker layout below.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker

impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 31). If you

will use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial setting for

speaker impedance.

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is

disconnected from the power source.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let

them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this

unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still

creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away

from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side

by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a

stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable

to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect

the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

■ Connecting to the speaker terminals

FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals.

If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of

the FRONT A or B terminals.

The Canada model cannot output to two pairs of speaker systems

simultaneously.

CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

SURROUND ZONE 2(3) terminals

Connect surround speakers to these terminals.

SUBWOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect surround back speakers to these terminals.

If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it

to the left (L) terminals.

SBR

SBL

: Di-pole speaker

: Direction of the di-pole speaker phase

Connecting speakers

Note

CAUTION

CONNECTIONS

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3 Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker

terminal wrench.

4 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side

of each terminal.

5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the

supplied speaker terminal wrench.

6 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto

WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this

unit when not in use.

10 mm (3/8 in)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) terminals

Connect presence speakers to these terminals.

You can also use these terminals to connect the Zone 2 speakers

(see page 105).

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each

terminal.

3 Return the tab to secure the wire.

■ Connecting the banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug

connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close

the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.

■ Speaker layout

Refer to the following illustration as to where to place

each speaker in your listening room.

1 Subwoofer

2 Front right speaker

3 Front left speaker

4 Center speaker

5 Surround back right speaker

6 Surround back left speaker

7 Surround right speaker

8 Surround left speaker

9 Presence right speaker

10 Presence left speaker

Note

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

CONNECTIONS

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE

SURROUND BACK

SINGLE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

–

––

–

PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

231

7 8 65 109

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back speakers

LeftRight

LeftRight LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

LeftRight

Presence speakers

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set

to prioritize either set of speakers using the PRIORITY parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 79).

• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and operate

only when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, Dolby Pro Logic x, THX Select2, THX Music, THX Games or THX Surround EX

decoder is turned on.

• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields

are selected.

Subwoofer with

built-in amplifier

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Some of the speakers commercially available these days

have speaker wire connections that allow bi-wiring or bi-

amplification to enhance the performance of the speaker

system. This unit allows you to make bi-wire and bi-AMP

connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers

support bi-wiring or bi-amplification. As these speakers

are shipped to you, you will note gold-plated shorting bars

or bridges, one connecting the two red input terminals and

the other connecting the two black input terminals.

Remove these shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to

bi-wire or bi-AMP your speakers.

■ Conventional connection

If you want to connect your speakers as traditional

loudspeakers using the conventional connection method,

connect your speakers using the regular left and right

speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of

terminals.

■ Bi-wire connection

The bi-wire connection separates the woofer from the

combined midrange and tweeter section. A bi-wire

compatible speaker has four binding post terminals. These

two sets of terminals allow the speaker to be split into two

independent sections. This split connects the mid and high

frequency drivers to one set of terminals and the low

frequency driver to the other pair.

• Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low

pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.

• To use the bi-wire connections, press SPEAKERS A on the

front panel so that SP A lights up in the front panel display.

■ Bi-AMP connection

The bi-AMP connection uses two amplifiers for both

speakers. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section

of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the

combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement

each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.

This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much

simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence

the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the

speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high

pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes

frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above

the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes

frequencies above its cutoff.

• Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low

pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.

• To activate the bi-AMP connections, set BI-AMP to ON in

ADVANCED SETUP (see page 91).

• To make the bi-AMP connections, use the FRONT and

SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below.

Using bi-wire and bi-AMP

connections

Notes

FRONT

–

This unit

Shorting bars

or bridges

Shorting bars

or bridges

Notes

FRONT

–

This unit

FRONT

SINGLE

–

SURROUND BACK

–

This unit

CONNECTIONS

Do not connect this unit or other components to the main

power until all connections between components are

complete.

■ Cable indications

■ Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this

unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs

to the left jacks.

■ Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks

are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input at the analog jacks are only output at the

analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the

digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output at the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

Information on cables and jacks

used for connections

CAUTION

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

For HDMI signals

Note

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Audio jacks

This unit has four types of audio jacks (analog audio, digital audio coaxial, digital audio optical and HDMI). Connection

depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components.

AUDIO jacks

For conventional analog audio signals.

DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via digital coaxial

cables.

DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks

For digital audio signals transmitted via digital optical

cables.

HDMI jacks

For HDMI digital audio signals.

■ Audio signal flow for OUT (REC)

• The audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks only and are not output at the

analog OUT (REC) jacks.

• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at

the HDMI OUT jack only when HDMI SET is set to OTHER (see page 82).

• 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals except multi-channel PCM signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be

output at the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks.

• Copy-protected 2-channel PCM signals with over 48 kHz/16 bit input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are not output at the

DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks.

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

AUDIO

HDMI

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

Notes

DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL)

DIGITAL AUDIO

(COAXIAL)

HDMI

AUDIO

Digital output

Output

OUT (REC)

Input

Analog output

Digital audio

Analog audio

Through

CONNECTIONS

■ Video jacks

This unit has four types of video jacks (composite, component, S-video and HDMI). Connection depends on the

availability of input jacks on your monitor. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 85), the analog video signals input at

the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks interchangeably. In addition, when V CONV.

is set to ON (see page 85) and HDMI I/P is set to ON (see

page 86), the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be digitally up-

converted and output at the HDMI OUT jack.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (P

B, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

HDMI jacks

For HDMI digital video signals.

■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT

• The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i to 480p. Set CMPNT I/P to ON in

MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 85).

• The analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and output at the S VIDEO or VIDEO jacks cannot be converted to

480p/1080i/720p.

• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input

signals is as follows where the analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks have the top priority.

1. COMPONENT VIDEO

2. S VIDEO

3. VIDEO

• Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 85) and HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 86) are available

only when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 85).

VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y P

HDMI

Notes

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

Through

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 85)

HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 86)

Digital video

Analog video

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

This unit has the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks for digital audio and video signal input as well as the HDMI OUT

jack for digital audio and video signal output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI OUT

jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack

of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a projector).

The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack you selected using the HDMI IN menu in I/O

ASSIGNMENT (see page 83) or the INPUT selector on the front panel are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. In

addition, the audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output to speakers, headphones and the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Digital audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks.

• Some audio signals may not be output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks depending on the signal type.

• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output

at the HDMI OUT jack. Set HDMI I/P to ON in MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 86).

• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio signals being input if they are in

the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly and HDCP ERROR appears in the front panel display as if the

DVI monitors do not support the HDCP copy protection standards.

Connecting HDMI components

Notes

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

HDMI

Cable TV or

Satellite tuner

Video

monitor

HDMI out

DVD Player

HDMI out

HDMI in

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting a DVD player

Check the availability of jacks on your DVD player and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output. However, in case

you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable.

Connecting video components

Note

MONITOR OUT

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

VIDEO

OUTPUT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

DVD

COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

PBY

DVD

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

HDMI

DVD player

Video

monitor

Coaxial out

Video out

Audio out

Video in

Optical out

HDMI out

HDMI in

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting other video components

Check the availability of jacks on your other video components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output.

However, in case you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable.

Note

AUDIOVIDEO

S VIDEO

CBL/

SAT

VIDEO

OUT

VCR 1

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

CBL/SAT

COAXIAL

DVR/

VCR 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

PRPBY

DTV

CBL/

SAT

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

HDMI

LR LR

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out

Video out

Audio in

Coaxial out

HDMI in

HDMI out

Video

monitor

(U.S.A. model)

HDMI out

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or

pre-amplifier.

If you set INPUT CH to 8ch in MULTI CH SET (see page 84), you can use the input jacks assigned as FRONT in

MULTI CH SET (see page 84) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.

■ Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel

Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit.

Notes

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

AUDIO

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

OUT

DVR/VCR 2

VCR 1

AUDIO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

LRLR

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Multi-format player/

External decoder

For 6-channel input For 8-channel input

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Front out

Surround out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Surround

back out

S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

Game

console or

video camera

Video out

S-video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

Optical out

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

• Check the availability of jacks on your audio components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output.

• PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC

cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks.

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to

the GND terminal for some record players.

Connecting audio components

Notes

AUDIO

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

OUT

(REC)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/TAPE

CD-R

COAXIAL

GND

LRLRLR LR

LRLR

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

CD recorder

Turntable

Optical out

Coaxial out

Audio in

Optical in

Audio inAudio out

Audio out

GND

Audio out

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.

• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the

external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.

• The signal output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE

OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.

• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is set to

ZONE B (see page 87), signals will only be output at the

FRONT PRE OUT jacks.

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel line output jacks.

2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel line output jacks.

3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT

jacks

Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If

you only connect one external amplifier for the surround

back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack.

5 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel line output jack.

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the

corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround

back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals

output at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks

may not correspond to the correct speakers.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer.

• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE

OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET settings (see

page 78).

Notes

FRONT

SURROUND

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE

CENTER

SINGLE

(SB)

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal

strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND

terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

Connecting the antennas

TUNER

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

AM ANTGND

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference,

connect the antenna

GND terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting the AC power cable

Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after

all other connections are complete, then plug the AC

power cable to an AC wall outlet.

Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as

doing so may result in fire hazard or electrical shock.

■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

Use these 2 outlets to supply power to any connected

components. Connect the AC power cables of your other

components to these 2 outlets. Power to these 2 outlets is

supplied when the main room, Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned

on. However, power to these 2 outlets is cut off when the

main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off or when

MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed and

released outward to the OFF position. The maximum

power or the total power consumption of the components

that can be connected to these 2 outlets is 100 W.

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

inward to the ON position to turn on the

power of this unit.

• Only this unit is turned on.

• Zone 2 and Zone 3 are set to the standby mode.

2 Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel

(or STANDBY on the remote control) to set

this unit to the standby mode.

Connecting the power cable

CAUTION

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

100W MAX.TOTAL

SWITCHED

(U.S.A. model)

Turning on and off this unit

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

2,31,4

(U.S.A. model)

MASTER

OFF

ON/OFF

STANDBY

Front panel Remote control

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

3 Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF

or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel (or

POWER on the remote control) to turn on this

unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3.

• When MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON

position, you can also press POWER or STANDBY on the

remote control to turn on or set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone

3 to the standby mode simultaneously.

• For details about controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 using the

remote control, see page 106.

MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF and ZONE 3

ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when

MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.

4 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel

again to release it outward to the OFF

position to turn off this unit.

This unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off.

Follow the procedure below to change the impedance

setting for all speakers.

If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to

6 ohms before using this unit.

1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to set

this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby

mode.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on the

power of this unit.

SP IMP.–8ΩMIN appears in the front panel display.

3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to select the impedance of

your speakers.

• Select 6 ohms if you are using 6 ohm speakers.

4 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to save

the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and

Zone 3 to the standby mode.

This unit will be set to the standby mode.

You can also set the speaker impedance by using the SP

IMP. parameter in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see

page 90).

Note

ON/OFF

POWER

Front panel Remote control

MASTER

OFF

Setting the speaker impedance

CAUTION

Note

MASTER

OFF

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MASTER

OFF

SP IMP.-8 MIN

ADVANCED SETUP

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MASTER

OFF

AUTO SETUP

This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you

avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and

achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound

your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• If the AUTO SETUP procedure stops and error messages

appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 115.

YPAO performs the following checks and makes

appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible

sound from your system.

WIRING

Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of

each speaker.

DISTANCE

Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening

position and adjusts the timing of each channel.

SIZE

Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the

appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.

Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric

equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and

create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly

important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers

for some channels or have a room with unique sonic

characteristics.

YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three

parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the

seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly

precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.

LEVEL

Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure

to disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat

level surface with the omni-directional

microphone head upward, at your normal

listening position.

If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer

mic at the same height as your ears would be when

you are seated in your listening position.

AUTO SETUP

Introduction

Notes

Optimizer microphone setup

Notes

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDI O

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE

Optimizer microphone position

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible

during the AUTO SETUP procedure (YPAO). If there is

too much ambient noise, the results may not be

satisfactory.

• You can run AUTO SETUP using the system menu that appears

in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the

OSD illustrations to explain the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• If an error occurs during the AUTO SETUP procedure and an

error message appears in the front panel display, see pages 115

and 116 for a complete list of error messages and proper

remedies.

• If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the

crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or

slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

2 Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP and then

press ENTER once to enter the main menu.

3 Press n to select SETUP and then press

l / h to select:

AUTO

To automatically perform the entire AUTO SETUP

procedure.

RELOAD

To restore the last AUTO SETUP setting.

RELOAD is available only when you have previously run

the AUTO SETUP procedure.

Using AUTO SETUP

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

MIN

MAX

Subwoofer

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

NIGHT

AUDI O

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

EXIT

PURE DIRECT

TOP

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOLUME

–

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDI O SE L

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

PRESET/CH

PURE DIRECT

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

STRAIGHT

A-E/CAT.

2-9

(U.S.A. model)

Note

AMP

SOURCE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AUTO SETUP

4 Press k / n repeatedly to select WIRING,

DISTANCE, SIZE, EQ or LEVEL.

5 When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is

selected, press l / h to select:

CHECK

To automatically check and adjust the selected item.

SKIP

To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments.

When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure

that SML or SMLx2 is selected in SPEAKER SET (see

page 78) and that 80Hz is selected in CROSS OVER (see

page 79).

When EQ is selected, press l / h to select:

NATURAL

To average out the frequency response of all speakers

with higher frequencies being less emphasized.

Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little

harsh.

FLAT

To average the frequency response of all speakers.

Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar

quality.

FRONT

To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in

accordance with the sound of your front speakers.

Recommended if your front speakers are of much

higher quality than your other speakers.

SKIP

To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments.

6 Press n to select START and then press

ENTER.

Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and

WAIT appears during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

If E-10:INTERNAL ERROR appears during testing, restart

the procedure from step 3.

■ If you selected AUTO in step 3

The RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set.

7 Press k / n to select RESULT and then press

ENTER to display the AUTO SETUP results.

• Press l / h repeatedly to move between each display.

• If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually

adjust each setup parameter, run MANUAL SETUP (see

page 75).

Note

AUTO:MENU

.SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

WIRING;;;;;;CHECK

DISTANCE;;;;CHECK

SIZE;;;;;;;;CHECK

EQ;;;;;;;;;;NATURAL

LEVEL;;;;;;;CHECK

START

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

RESULT:EXIT

WARNING 0

RESULT

. SP : 5/4/0.1

. DIST: 4.50/ 6.10m

. LVL :-10.0/ +6.5dB

. >SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

RESULT:WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;;;OK

FRONT L;;;;4.5m

CENTER;;;;;5.2m

FRONT R;;;;4.8m

PRNS L;;;;;5.2m

PRNS R;;;;;5.3m

RESULT:DISTANCE1

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

FRONT L;;;;;;LRG

RESULT:SIZE

CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB

2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB

3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB

4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB

5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB

6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB

7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB

RESULT:EQ

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

FRONT L;;;+1.0dB

CENTER;;;;-1.5dB

FRONT R;;;+6.5dB

PRNS L;;;-10.0dB

PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB

RESULT:LEVEL1

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

Results of the speaker

connection and wiring

Results of the speaker

distance from the

listening position

Results of the

frequency response of

each speaker

Results of the

parametric equalizer of

each speaker

Results of the volume

level of each speaker

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of

your listening environment, run AUTO SETUP again to

re-calibrate your system.

• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be

longer than the actual distance depending on the

characteristics of your subwoofer.

• In the EQ results, different values may be set for the same

band to provide finer adjustments.

8 Press ENTER to return to the RESULT:EXIT

screen.

9 Make sure that the pointer is pointing at SET

and CANCEL and then press l / h to select

SET or CANCEL.

• Select SET to confirm the AUTO SETUP results.

• Select CANCEL to cancel the AUTO SETUP

results.

10 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The SET MENU screen appears in the OSD.

■ If you selected RELOAD in step 3

The RESULT:EXIT display appears.

7 Make sure that the pointer is pointing at SET

and CANCEL and then press l / h to select

SET or CANCEL.

• Select SET to confirm the AUTO SETUP results.

• Select CANCEL to cancel the AUTO SETUP

results.

8 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.

The SET MENU screen appears in the OSD.

Notes

RESULT:EXIT

WARNING 0

RESULT

. SP : 5/4/0.1

. DIST: 4.50/ 6.10m

. LVL :-10.0/ +6.5dB

. >SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

RESULT:EXIT

WARNING 0

RESULT

. SP : 5/4/0.1

. DIST: 4.50/ 6.10m

. LVL :-10.0/ +6.5dB

. >SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

PLAYBACK

Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS.

If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage

your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player

before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.

1 Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or set

AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

POWER on the remote control) to turn on the

power of this unit.

2 Turn on the power of the video monitor

connected to this unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel

(or press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote

control).

Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the

respective speakers are turned on or off.

When bi-wiring, select both A and B.

4 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the desired

input source.

The name of the currently selected input source

appears in the front panel display and on the video

monitor for a few seconds.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the component.

See page 46 for details about tuning instructions.

PLAYBACK

CAUTION

Basic operations

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

1 4

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

EXIT

PURE DIRECT

TOP

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOLUME

–

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDI O SE L

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

PRESET/CH

PURE DIRECT

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

STRAIGHT

(U.S.A. model)

ON/OFF

POWER

Front panel

Remote control

AMP

SOURCE

Note

SPEAKERS

+10

ENT.

SPEAKERS

Front panel Remote control

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

INPUT

Front panel Remote control

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

A.SEL: AUTO

INPUT: DVD

Name of the currently selected input source

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

6 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press

VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust

the volume to the desired output level.

7 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel (or press one of the sound field

program buttons on the remote control) to

select the desired sound field program.

The name of the selected sound field program appears

in the front panel display and on the video monitor.

See page 64 for details about sound field programs.

• Choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, and not on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the

MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

■ Notes on Dialogue Normalization

(Dial Norm)

Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby

Digital and DTS, which is used to keep the programs at

the same average listening level so the user does not have

to change the volume control between Dolby Digital and

DTS programs. When playing back software which has

been encoded in Dolby Digital and DTS, sometimes you

may see a brief message in the front panel display which

will read “Dial Norm X dB” (X being a numeric value).

The display is showing how the program level relates with

THX calibration level. If you want to play the program at

calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust the

volume.

For example, if you see the following message:

“Dial Norm + 4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the

overall output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn

down the volume control by 4dB. However, unlike a

movie theater where the playback loudness is preset, you

can choose your preferred volume setting for best

enjoyment.

Notes

VOLUME

–

Remote control

Front panel

PROGRAM

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Remote control

Front panel

HiFi DSP

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Hall in Vienna

MUSIC

Program name

Name of the sound field category

DialNorm;;+4dB

PLAYBACK

■ Adjusting the tonal quality

Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for

the front L/R and center speaker channels.

1 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS.

2 Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the

high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the

low-frequency response (BASS).

3 Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select

BYPASS and cancel the tone control.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the

low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of

the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and

center speakers.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (see page 40) or

PURE DIRECT (see page 41) is selected, or when

MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

■ Muting the sound output

Use this feature to mute the sound output.

1 Press MUTE on the remote control.

The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel

display.

2 Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to

resume the sound output.

The MUTE indicator disappears from the display.

You can adjust how much the muting function reduces the sound

output (see page 82).

■ Using SILENT CINEMA

Use this feature to enjoy multi-channel music or movie

sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround,

through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA

activates automatically whenever you connect headphones

to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or

HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the

SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel

display.

SILENT CINEMA is ineffective in the following cases:

– MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input mode.

– PURE DIRECT is selected.

– A 2ch Stereo program is selected.

– This unit is in the STRAIGHT mode.

Additional operations

Notes

TONE

CONTROL

PROGRAM

TONE

CONTROL

Note

MUTE

Flashes

MUTE

VOLUME

–

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel or

MULTI CH IN on the remote control so that MULTI

CH INPUT appears in the front panel display and

on the video monitor.

When MULTI CH INPUT is shown in the front panel display and

the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or one of the input selector buttons on the remote control), press

MULTI CH INPUT so that MULTI CH INPUT disappears from

the front panel display and the video monitor.

■ Enjoying multi-channel software in

6.1/7.1 channel surround

If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use

this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for

multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic x,

Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch

between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.

2 Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder

when the name of a decoder (PL xMovie, for

example) is displayed in the front panel

display.

Auto

AUTO

If a signal flag can be recognized, the unit selects the

optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1

channels. If the signal flag cannot be recognized, or

no flag is present in the input signal, this unit cannot

automatically play back the signal in 6.1/7.1

channels.

Decoders

You can select a decoder from the following list

depending on the format of the software you are

playing.

PL xMovie

To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1

channels using the Pro Logic x movie decoder.

PL xMusic

To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic x music decoder.

EX/ES

To play back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels

using the DTS-ES decoder.

To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

OFF

To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1

channels.

When SB L/R SP is set to LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 79), the

surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND

BACK speaker terminals.

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag

which cannot be automatically detected. When you play these

kinds of discs in 6.1-channel, select decoders (PL xMovie,

PL xMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually.

• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is

pressed in the following cases:

– When SUR. L/R SP or SB L/R SP is set to NONE

(see page 79).

– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

are being played.

– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R

channel signals.

– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.

• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be

reset to AUTO.

• The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when SB L/R SP is

set to NONE (see page 79).

• PL xMovie cannot be selected when SB L/R SP is set to

LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 79).

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

EXTD SUR.

AMP

SOURCE

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Notes

PLAYBACK

■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back in multiple channels.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

STANDARD on the remote control to switch

between the Surround and Enhanced

programs.

You can also press MOVIE or THX on the remote

control to select the MOVIE THEATER or THX

programs.

2 Press SELECT on the remote control to

select a decoder.

You can select a decoder from the following list

depending on the type of software you are playing

and your personal preference.

Decoder types for the Surround program

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.

<Neo:6 Cinema>

DTS processing for movie software.

<Neo:6 Music>

DTS processing for music software.

Decoder types for the Enhanced, MOVIE

THEATER or THX program

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.

<Neo:6 Cinema>

DTS processing for movie software.

• You can also select a decoder by using DECODER MODE in

INPUT MENU (see page 84).

• You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote

control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message

display.

The Pro Logic x decoder automatically changes to the

Pro Logic decoder when SB L/R SP is set to NONE

(see page 79).

STANDARD

AMP

SOURCE

MOVIE

THX

SELECT

Note

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Using PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT bypasses the decoders and DSP

processors of this unit as well as shuts down the video

circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound

fidelity from analog and PCM sources.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

the PURE DIRECT mode.

• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input. When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be

heard.

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL on the front panel and the OSD menu

settings are ineffective in the PURE DIRECT mode.

• The following operations are not possible in the PURE

DIRECT mode:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the short message

– adjusting OSD menu parameters

– all video functions including video conversions

– HDMI digital video up-conversion of analog video signals

– HDMI features including digital input and output

• PURE DIRECT is automatically canceled whenever this unit is

set to the standby mode.

1 Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on

the remote control to activate pure direct.

The indicator around the button on the front panel

lights up and the front panel display automatically

goes out

The front panel display switches on momentarily when an

operation is performed.

2 Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on

the remote control again to deactivate pure

direct.

The indicator around the button on the front panel

goes out and the previous settings are restored.

■ Using the night listening modes

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volume levels or at night. Choose

either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on

the type of source you are playing.

• You cannot use the night listening modes if PURE DIRECT or

MULTI CH INPUT are being used or if headphones are

connected even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when

PURE DIRECT is selected.

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and the surround sound settings being used.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to

select NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC.

When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volume levels.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select NIGHT:OFF if you do not want to use this

function.

2 Press l / h to adjust the effect level of

compression while NIGHT:CINEMA or

NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.

Choices: MIN, MID, MAX

• Select MIN for minimum compression.

• Select MID for standard compression.

• Select MAX for maximum compression.

NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC settings are stored

independently.

Notes

Note

PURE DIRECT

Front panel Remote control

PURE DIRECT

Front panel Remote control

Notes

NIGHT

AUDIO

AMP

SOURCE

NIGHT

Lights up

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

PLAYBACK

■ Using the sleep timer

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLETS.

1 Select an input source and start playback on

the source component.

2 Press SLEEP on the remote control

repeatedly to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the

amount of time for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound

field program.

3 Press SLEEP repeatedly so that SLEEP OFF

appears in the front panel display.

After a few seconds, SLEEP OFF disappears, and the

SLEEP indicator turns off.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on

the front panel) to set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby

mode.

■ Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multi-

channel sources.

Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or set

AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch

Stereo.

2ch Stereo appears in the front panel display.

You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or

BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT (see page 78).

■ Listening to unprocessed input signals

When the unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel

stereo sources are output only from the front L/R speakers.

Multi-channel sources are decoded straightly into the

appropriate channels without any additional effect

processing.

1 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel or on the remote control to select

STRAIGHT.

STRAIGHT appears in the front panel display.

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

SLEEP00120min

SLEEP 120min

SLEEP

HiFi DSP

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Hall in Vienna

MUSIC

SLEEP

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

SLEEP OFF

Note

2ch Stereo

STEREO

AMP

SOURCE

Front panel

PROGRAM

Remote control

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

Front panel Remote control

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

2 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel or on the remote control again to turn

the sound effect back on.

STRAIGHT disappears from the front panel display.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.

If you set SUR. L/R SP to NONE (see page 78), Virtual

CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you

select a CINEMA DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP is ineffective even if SUR. L/R SP is set to

NONE (see page 78) in the following cases:

– If MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

– If headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

■ Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine images from a video source with sound

from an audio source. For example, you can listen to

classical music while enjoying beautiful scenery from the

video source on the video monitor.

Press one of the input selector buttons on the

remote control to select a video source and then

select an audio source.

If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select

the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front

panel or on the remote control.

■ Selecting audio input modes

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can

select the type of input signal you want to use.

This feature is not available if no digital input jacks (OPTICAL,

COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not

available as an input mode if HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks

are not assigned. Use I/O ASSIGNMENT in INPUT MENU to

reassign the respective input jacks (see page 83).

Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or

AUDIO SEL on the remote control to select an

input mode.

AUTO

Automatically selects input signals in the following

order:

1) HDMI

2) Digital signals

3) Analog signals

HDMI

Selects only HDMI signals. If no HDMI signals are

input, no sound is output.

COAX/OPT

Selects digital signals input at the OPTICAL or

COAXIAL jacks. Use if HDMI signals are also being

input.

ANALOG

Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are

input, no sound is output.

Note

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

Front panel Remote control

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

Note

AUDIO

SELECT

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

A.SEL: AUTO

INPUT: DVD

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

Front panel Remote control

Type of the input mode

PLAYBACK

• We recommend using AUTO in most cases.

• You can designate the default input mode to be selected when

the power of this unit is turned on (see page 86).

• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

• If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder

automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program.

• The input jacks not assigned are not available as input modes.

■ Displaying information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

SET MENU on the remote control.

The top SET MENU screen appears in the OSD.

2 Press n repeatedly to select INFORMATION

and then press ENTER.

The following information appears in the OSD.

Press l / h to toggle between the audio and video

information displays.

Audio information

FORMAT

Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a

digital signal, it automatically switches to analog

input.

SAMPLING

Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to

detect the sampling frequency “?” appears.

CHANNEL

Number of source channels in the input signal. For

example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front

channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed

as “3/2/0.1”.

BITRATE

Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate

“– – –” appears.

DIALOGUE

Dialogue normalization information for Dolby

Digital and DTS signals.

FLAG

Flag data encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS and PCM

signals that cue this unit to automatically switch

decoders.

Video information

HDMI Signal Type

Type of the HDMI signals input or output at the

HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.

HDMI Resolution

Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the

HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit.

Analog Resolution

Resolution of the analog signals input or output at the

video component jacks of this unit.

3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again

to exit.

Notes

Note

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

AMP

SOURCE



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

RECORDING

BASIC

OPERATION

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for those components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

See page 30 for details.

2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and

then press one of the input selector buttons)

to select the input source you want to record

from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 can be

selected separately.

• When this unit is in the standby mode, you cannot record from

other components connected to this unit.

• The settings for TONE CONTROL (see page 38), VOLUME,

SP LEVEL (see page 80) and programs do not affect recorded

material.

• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when

recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source

component is connected to provide only an S-video or only a

composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or only

a composite video signal to your VCR.

• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not

output at the analog AUDIO OUT L/R jacks for recording.

Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN L/R jacks are

not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your

source component is connected to provide only digital or analog

signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC)

channel. For example, the signal input at VCR 1 IN is not

output at VCR 1 OUT.

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

• Some HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN

2 jack of this unit may not be output at the DIGITAL AUDIO

(OPTICAL) jacks depending on the type of those HDMI audio

signals.

■ Notes on the DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded in DTS, when your player is

compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation

instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will

be output from the player.

RECORDING

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R O PTICA L

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

Front panel

Remote control

Notes

If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

FM/AM TUNING

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and

then press TUNER on the remote control) to

select TUNER as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on

the remote control) to select the reception

band.

FM or AM appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)

repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator lights

up in the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to

begin automatic tuning.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency.

Press l to tune into a lower frequency.

When the unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

FM/AM TUNING

Automatic tuning

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

332

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

TUNER

AMP

SOURCE

Front panel

Remote control

DISPLAY

FM/AM

LEVEL

TITLE

BAND

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING

MODE

AUTO

Lights up

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

A1:AM 1070 kHz

Name of the sound field program

Frequency of

the received

station

Preset station

group and

number

Reception

band

PRESET/TUNING/CH

AUTO

TUNED

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

A1:AM 1530 kHz

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

Manual tuning is effective when stations signals are weak.

Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically

change the reception mode to monaural reception to

increase the signal quality.

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning”

to select TUNER and the reception band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)

repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in the PRESET mode and tuning is not

possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it

off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to

manually tune into the desired station.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency.

Press l to tune into a lower frequency.

Press and hold the button to continue searching.

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals

and store up to 40 (8 stations in each of the 5 groups, A1

to E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press

TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input

source.

1 Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on

the remote control) to select FM as the

reception band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that

the AUTO indicator lights up in the front

panel display.

Manual tuning

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING

MODE

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Straight

A1:AM 1070 kHz

PRESET/TUNING/CH

Automatic preset tuning

Note

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

321

(U.S.A. model)

DISPLAY

FM/AM

LEVEL

TITLE

BAND

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING

MODE

AUTO

Lights up

FM/AM TUNING

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

on the front panel for more than 3 seconds.

The preset group and number as well as the

MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After

approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts

from the currently selected frequency and proceeds

toward the higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• Any station data stored under a preset station number is cleared

when you store a new station under the same preset station

number.

• If the preset number of the received stations does not reach 40

(E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after

programming all available stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it by following the procedure in “Manual preset

tuning”.

■ Customized automatic preset tuning

You can specify a preset station group and a preset station

number from which this unit stores the FM stations

received by automatic preset tuning.

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning”.

2 Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING/

CH l / h on the front panel to select the

preset station group and the preset station

number where the first received station will

be stored.

For example, if you select C5, the first received

station is automatically programmed to C5 and the

next received stations are sequentially programmed to

C6, C7, etc.

Automatic preset tuning stops when the received stations have all

been stored up to E8.

Notes

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

AUTO MEMORY

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Straight

C8:FM 87.5 MHz

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

PRESET/TUNING/CH

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations

in each of the 5 groups, A1 to E8) manually.

You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press

TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input

source.

1 Repeat steps in “Automatic tuning” or

“Manual tuning” to tune into a station

automatically or manually.

See page 46 for tuning instructions.

When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel

display shows the frequency of the received station.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel.

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel

repeatedly to select a preset station group (A

to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears in the front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the

front panel to select a preset station number

(1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

Press PRESET/TUNING/CH h on the front panel to

select a higher preset station number.

Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l on the front panel to

select a lower preset station number.

Manual preset tuning

Note

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

3 2,5

(U.S.A. model)

TUNED

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

A :AM 630 kHz

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

TUNED

MEMORY

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C :AM 630 kHz

Preset station group

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNED

MEMORY

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C3:AM 630 kHz

FM/AM TUNING

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The station band and frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset group and number you

have selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting

the preset station number under which it was stored.

Prior to selecting a preset station, you should preset stations first.

For details, see “Automatic preset tuning” on page 47 or “Manual

preset tuning” on page 49.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and

then press TUNER on the remote control) to

select TUNER as the input source.

2 Press A/B/C/D/E (or l / h on the remote

control) to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears in the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

Notes

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

TUNED

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C3:AM 630 kHz

Selecting preset stations

Note

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R O PTICA L

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

TUNER

AMP

SOURCE

Front panel

Remote control

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

Front panel

Remote control

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET k / n on the remote control) to

select a preset station number (1 through 8).

The preset group and number appear in the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the TUNED indicator lights up.

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station E1 with A5.

1 Select preset station E1 by using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

E1 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station A5 by using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

A5 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Front panel

Remote control

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

TUNED

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

PRESET/TUNING/CH

Exchanging preset stations

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

1,3

2,4

(U.S.A. model)

PRESET/TUNING/CH

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

TUNED

MEMORY

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

TUNED

MEMORY

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

TUNED

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

EDIT E1-A5

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with

millions of listeners across the United States broadcasting

live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes

more than 150 digital channels of choice from coast to

coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip

hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33

channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and

entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels

of the traffic and weather information for major

metropolitan areas nationwide.

Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you

will need to set up an account and activate service with

XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check

your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio”

on page 54. For further information on XM Satellite Radio

services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com”.

■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.

Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold

separately. Premium Channel available at additional

monthly cost. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,

including a one-time activation fee may apply.

Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and

programming subject to change. Channels with frequent

explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel

blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling

1-800-XMRADIO. Subscriptions subject to Customer

Agreement available at xmradio.com. Only available in

property of their respective owners.

Connect the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear of

this unit. (For details, refer to the operating instructions

provided with the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory).

• For information on obtaining the XM Connect-and-Play digital

antenna accessory, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com” or consult your local retailer that

sells XM Ready products.

• To ensure the optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio

signals, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory

must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no

obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or

outdoors.

SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

What is XM Satellite Radio? XM Satellite Radio connections

Notes

IN 1

IN 2

OUT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

CD DVD

COAXIAL

RS-232C

HDMI

DVR/

VCR 2

COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

PBY

DVD

DTV

CBL/

SAT

XM jack

(U.S.A. model)

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

This section describes the functions of each control used for XM Satellite Radio tuning.

The following controls are only available when XM is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set

AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select XM as the input source.

■ Front panel functions

1 CATEGORY

(All Channel Search mode)

Changes the channel category to next one (while staying

in the All Channel Search mode).

(Category Search mode)

Changes the channel category to next one.

(Preset Search mode)

Switches between five preset groups (A to E).

2 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Searches a radio channel within all channels. Press and

hold for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Searches a radio channel within the selected category.

Press and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).

3 SEARCH MODE

Switches between the All Channel Search, Category

Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 56).

4 DISPLAY

Switches XM information such as channel number/name,

category or artist name/song title displayed in the front

panel display (see page 60).

5 MEMORY

Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.

■ Remote control functions

1 XM

Selects XM as the input source.

2 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the channel category.

Press PRESET/CH k / n to search a radio channel within

all channels. Press and hold for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the channel category.

Press PRESET/CH k / n to search a radio channel within

the selected category. Press and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the preset group (A to

E).

Press PRESET/CH

to change the preset number (1 to 8).

3 XM MEMORY

Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.

4 SRCH MODE

Switches between the All Channel Search, Category

Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 56.).

5 DISPLAY

Switches XM information such as channel number/name,

category or artist name/song title displayed in the front

panel display (see page 60).

6 Numeric buttons

(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)

Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.

(Preset Search mode)

Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.

7 ENT.

Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct

Number Access mode (see page 58).

XM Satellite Radio controls and functions

Note

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE

(U.S.A. model)

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

1 2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

SPEAKERSMEMORY

MEMORY

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

FREQ/TEXT

EON STARTMODE PTY SEEK

STRAIGHT

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

XM MEMORY

A-E/CAT.

(U.S.A. model)

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control functions

1 XM

Selects XM as the input source.

2 Input selector/numeric buttons

(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)

Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.

(Preset Search mode)

Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.

To enter numbers, you must press and hold SHIFT before you

press any of these buttons.

3 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Press l / h to change the channel category.

Press k / n to search a radio channel within all channels.

Press and hold for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Press l / h to change the channel category.

Press k / n to search a radio channel within the selected

category. Press and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Press l / h to change the preset group (A to E).

Press k / n to change the preset number (1 to 8).

4 ALL

Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 56).

5 ENT

Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct

Number Access mode (see page 58).

6 NUMBER

Press and hold before you press the input selector/numeric

buttons to switch the function to entering numbers.

7 DISPLAY

Switches XM information such as channel number/name,

category or artist name/song title displayed in the front

panel display (see page 60).

8 PRESET

Selects the Preset Search mode (see page 57).

9 CAT.

Selects the Category Search mode (see page 57)

To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio

service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.

Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and

then access the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com/”

or call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a

major credit card for signing up.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector (or set AMP/

SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM

on the remote control) to select XM as the

input source.

The XM indicator lights up.

Note

A-E/CAT.

CAT.

PRESET/CH

ZONE 3ZONE 2

ID2ID1

PRESET

ALL

DISPLAY

NUMBER

TUNER

CD-R

DTV

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

8 9

POWER

STANDBY

ENT

DVD

V-A UX

PHONO

Activating XM Satellite Radio

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Remote control

Front panel

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

INPUT: XM

AMP

SOURCE

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

2 Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level

and adjust the orientation of the XM Satellite

Radio antenna for a better percentage of the

reception level.

You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by

using the ANTENNA parameter in XM RADIO SET

(see page 88).

• If CHECK ANTENNA appears in the front panel display,

the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory may

not be connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit

properly. See “XM Satellite Radio connections” on

page 52 and check the connection.

• The ANTENNA parameter cannot be adjusted by using

the remote control.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to

select channel 0.

You cannot select channel 0 if the All Channel Search mode

(see page 56) is not selected.

4 Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number

displayed in the front panel display and write

it down.

ID:_____________________________________

Rotate the INPUT selector (or press XM on the

remote control) to select XM as the input source.

Information (such as channel number/name, category, or

artist name/song title) for the channel currently selected

appears in the front panel display and the XM indicator

lights up.

• Selecting the XM band automatically recalls the channel

previously selected.

• You can change the kind of channel information by pressing

DISPLAY repeatedly (see page 60).

The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks.

Notes

Note

PRESET/TUNING/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode

Note

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Remote control

Front panel

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

[001] Preview

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

You can search for the channel you want to listen to using

one of three search modes. You can also enter the number

directly to select the desired channel. For details, see

“Direct Number Access mode” on page 58.

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 55.

2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select ALL

CH SEARCH.

3 To change the channel category, press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote

control) repeatedly.

4 To search a channel within all channels,

press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control)

repeatedly.

You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing

and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/

CH k / n on the remote control).

Using XM Satellite Radio search

modes

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

(U.S.A. model)

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

ALL CH SEARCH0

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel

Remote control

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Front panel Remote control

Remote control

Front panel

PRESET/TUNING/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Category Search mode

1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 55.

2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select CAT

SEARCH.

3 To change the channel category, press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote

control) repeatedly.

4 To search a channel within the selected

channel category, press PRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote

control) repeatedly.

You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing

and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/

CH k / n on the remote control).

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you should preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels”

on page 59. All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls 001

Preview by the factory setting.

1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 55.

2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select

PRESET SEARCH.

3 To change the preset group (A to E), press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote

control) repeatedly.

4 To change the preset number (1 to 8), press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k

/ n on the remote control) repeatedly.

You can also select the preset number directly by pressing

the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

(U.S.A. model)

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

CAT SEARCH

Front panel Remote control

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel

Remote control

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

PRESET/TUNING/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

(U.S.A. model)

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

PRESET SEARCH

Front panel Remote control

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel

Remote control

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Front panel

PRESET/TUNING/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 55.

2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select ALL

CH SEARCH or CAT SEARCH.

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

desired channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons as shown below.

The display changes as follows.

4 If you enter fewer than three numbers, you

may press ENT. to tune to the channel

immediately or wait a few seconds to confirm

the entered channel number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after entering

one-digit or two-digit number, the unit automatically

confirms the entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than numeric buttons or ENT.

cancels the direct number access procedure.

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

1 2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

SPEAKERSMEMORY

MEMORY

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

ON-SCREEN

FREQ/TEXT

EON STARTMODE PTY SEEK

STRAIGHT

XM MEMORY

(U.S.A. model)

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

ALL CH SEARCH0

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

CAT SEARCH

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

SEARCH MODE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

<XM> -12

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

<XM>123

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

<XM> --1

ENT.

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (eight preset numbers in five preset

groups, A1 to E8). You can then recall any preset channel

easily by selecting the preset group and number as

described in “Preset Search mode” on page 57.

1 Search the XM Satellite Radio channel you

want to set as a preset channel.

To search the desired channel, carry out “All Channel

Search mode” on page 56, “Category Search mode”

on page 57, or “Direct Number Access mode” on

page 58.

2 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or

XM MEMORY on the remote control) when

XM is selected as the input source.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for about five seconds.

3 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,

press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the

remote control) to select a preset group

(A to E).

The group letter appears.

4 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,

press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to

select a preset number (1 to 8).

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset

channels

SPEAKERS

YPAO

MULTI CH

INPUT

AUDIO

SELECT

TONE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

PRESET/

TUNING

EDIT

MAN'L/AUTO FM

SEARCH MODE

DISPLAY

AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT

TUNING

MODE

MEMORY

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ZONE CONTROL

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO/AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

PHONES

PRESET/TUNING/CH

OPTIMIZER

MIC

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUTMAIN ZONE

PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF

MASTER

ON OFF

MULTI ZONE

2,5

(U.S.A. model)

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

[040] Deep Tra

When the channel number 040 is selected

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

Front panel Remote control

RETURN

XM MEMORY

AUTO MEMORY

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C [040] Deep

Preset group

Front panel

Remote control

A/B/C/D/E

CATEGORY

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

AUTO MEMORY

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C5 [040] Deep

Preset number

Remote control

Front panel

PRESET/TUNING/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

5 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,

press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM

MEMORY on the remote control) to preset the

selected XM Satellite Radio channel.

A colon appears next to the preset number for

confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off.

Presetting a new channel clears the former preset channel

stored in the same preset group and number.

You can display XM information (such as channel

number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the

channel currently selected in the OSD and in the front

panel display.

You can select the amount of time while the XM Satellite Radio

information is displayed in the OSD (see page 88).

If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel

display, see TROUBLESHOOTING on page 113.

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD

Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the

remote control.

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press

ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the

OSD.

• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released

if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you

change the XM Satellite Radio channel.

• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information

screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM

Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote

control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio

information screen is being on hold.

Note

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

C5: [040] Deep

Colon appears

Front panel

Remote control

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

RETURN

XM MEMORY

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

Note

Notes

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING

MODE

DISPLAY

ON SCREEN

Front panel

Remote control



XM INFORMATION

ALL CH SEARCH

XM : 012

CHAN : Deep Tracks

CAT : Rock

NAME : Led Zeppelin

TITLE : StairwayToHeaven

. ([012]Deep Tra)

[]/[]:CHANNEL

[<]/[>]:CATEGORY

XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the

remote control repeatedly to toggle between the

following XM information display modes.

When the channel number/name is displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name/song title is displayed:

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. If the information contains more than 14

characters, the information scrolls from right to left.

• If the information contains a character that cannot be

recognized by the unit, the character will be displayed with an

underbar “_”.

AUTO/MAN'L

TUNING

MODE

DISPLAY

ON SCREEN

Channel name/number

Channel category

Artist name/Song title

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

[040] Deep Tra

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

<CAT>Rock

AUTO

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

Sci-Fi

Coldplay / Clo

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live

instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of

the room. In addition to making the sound live, these

reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,

and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are

two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to

make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.

Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic afterglow. They are non-directional, and lessen the

clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial

settings, you can change some of the parameters to better

suit the input source or your listening room.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Turn on the video monitor and press ON

SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display

mode.

For details on selecting the OSD mode, see page 89.

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

What is a sound field? Changing parameter settings

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOLUME

–

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

–

TV VOL

–

AMP

SOURCE

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDSFREQ/RDS EONEON MODEMODE PTY SEEKPTY SEEK STARTSTART

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

4,5

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

3 Select the sound field program you want to

adjust.

4 Press k / n to select the parameters.

5 Press l / h to change the parameter value.

When you set a parameter to a value other than the

factory preset, an asterisk mark (*)

appears by the parameter name

on the video monitor.

6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to

change other program parameters.

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,

press k / n.

• You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD

is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set

MEMORY GUARD to OFF (see page 86).

■ Resetting parameters to the factory

values

To reset a certain parameter

Select the parameter you want to reset, then press l / h

repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter

name disappears from the video monitor.

To reset all parameters

Use PARAM. INI (see page 87).

Notes

MUSIC

P.INIT.DLY;;21ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;31ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

Pop/Rock

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

SPEAKERSMEMORY

Sound field category

Parameters Parameter values

Cursor

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to

AUTO (see page 43) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.

• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked MULTI

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked 2-CH can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to

select sound field programs, see “Basic operations” on page 36.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Notes

For movie/video sources

Source

Remote

control

button

Category

and

Program

Features

MULTI

2-CH

STEREO

2ch Stereo

2 channel (left and right) playback.

STEREO

7ch Stereo

HiFi DSP processing. Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all

speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at

parties, etc.

MUSIC

Hall in Vienna

HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately

1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which

produce a very full, rich sound.

MUSIC

The Bttm Line

HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line,

a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in

a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

MUSIC

The Roxy Thtr

HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data

for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat

is at the center-left of the hall.

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets

you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

ENTERTAINMENT

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively

disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is

also characterized by high-energy, immediate sound.

THX

THX Music

THX processing for all 5.1 encoded music sources.

MULTI

STANDARD

q D+PL x Music

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.

STANDARD

DTS+PL x Music

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.

STANDARD

Enhanced

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

2-CH

STANDARD

PL x Music

Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.

STANDARD

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ DSP LEVEL (DSP level)

Function: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP

effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB

■ INIT. DLY / P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay)

Function: Changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay

between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the

farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.

Control range: 1

to 99 ms

■ ROOM SIZE / P. ROOM SIZE (Room size)

Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround

sound field becomes.

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Source sound

Early

reflections

Time Time Time

INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY

Sound source

Reflection face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Time

Source sound

Early

reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound source

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ LIVENESS (Liveness)

Function: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections

decay.

Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as dead, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as live.

The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the liveness of the

room.

Control range: 0 to 10

■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay)

Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound

field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels

are used.

Control range: 1 to 49 ms

■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size)

Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness)

Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

Control range: 0 to 10

■ SB. INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay)

Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field.

Control range: 1 to 49 ms

■ SB. ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size)

Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.

Control range: 0.1 to 2.0

■ SB. LIVENESS (Surround back liveness)

Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.

Control range: 0 to 10

Source sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small reflected

sound

Large reflected

sound

Small value = 0

Large value = 10

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

■ REV. TIME (Reverberation time)

Function: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB

(at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.

Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more live the listening room environment seems. The shorter the

reverberation time, the more dead the listening room environment seems.

Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s

■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level)

Function: Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control range: 0 to 100%

■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation delay)

Function: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the

reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control range: 0 to 250 ms

Reverberation

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

Source sound

REV.TIME

REV.TIME REV.TIME

Sound source Short

reverberation

Long

reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early reflections

Source sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Source sound

Reverberation

REV.TIME

REV.DELAY

Time

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ DIALOG LIFT (Dialog lift)

Function: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center

channel elements to the presence speakers.

Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.

Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

For 7ch Stereo

Function: Adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

CT LEVEL (Center level)

SL LEVEL (Surround left level)

SR LEVEL (Surround right level)

SB LEVEL (Surround back level)

PL LEVEL (Presence left level)

PR LEVEL (Presence right level)

For PL x Music

PANORAMA (Panorama)

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF, ON

DIMENSION (Dimension)

Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard)

CENTER WIDTH (Center width)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only

from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3

For Neo:6 Music

CENTER IMAGE (Center image)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

Control range: 0.0 to 1.0

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the following diagrams in the

table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program.

Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back.

Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as

special sound effects, etc.

The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows:

When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are turned off

When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and Priority is set to PRNS (see page 79)

When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and Priority is set to SB (see page 79)

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

Note

L Front left speaker PL Presence left speaker SR Surround right speaker

C Center speaker PR Presence right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker

R Front right speaker SL Surround left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker

Speaker from which sound is being output Speaker from which no sound is being output

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

STEREO

2ch Stereo

STEREO

7ch Stereo

when surround back speakers are connected

when surround back speakers are not connected

SBRSBL

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

MUSIC

Hall in Vienna

The Bttm Line

The Roxy Thtr

ENTERTAINMENT

Disco

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

ENTERTAINMENT

Variety/Sports

Mono Movie

Game

THX

THX Cinema

THX Surround

THX

THX Select2

Cinema

THX Music

THX

THX Game

STANDARD

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DTS

PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC

MOVIE THEATER

Enhanced

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC

DTS

PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

SBRSBL

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

STANDARD

PLIIx Movie

PLII Music

PLII Game

Movie/Game Movie/Music/Game

Music

MOVIE THEATER

Enhanced

PLII Movie

When Priority is set

to PRNS

When Priority is set

to SB

STANDARD

Neo:6 Cinema

Neo:6 Music

Cinema Cinema/Music

Music

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

SBRSBL

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS

MOVIE THEATER

Enhanced

Neo:6 Cinema

When Priority is set

to PRNS

When Priority is set

to SB

STRAIGHT

Monaural playback

PURE DIRECT

Monaural playback

2-channel audio

(monaural)

2-channel audio

(stereo)

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

5.1/6.1-channel

audio *

SBRSBL

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to manually adjust a variety of system settings and customize the

way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your

listening environment.

You can run MANUAL SETUP using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD

illustrations to explain the MANUAL SETUP procedure.

1 BASIC MENU

Use to manually adjust basic system parameters.

2 SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or

projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32).

Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32). You can use

SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running AUTO SETUP first.

3 INPUT MENU

Use to manually reassign digital input and output, select the input mode, rename your input, or specify external input

settings.

MANUAL SETUP

Item Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output and the cross over

frequency.

B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

D)THX SET Adjusts the THX settings.

E)TEST TONE

Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL and

SP DISTANCE settings.

Item Features Page

A)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.

B)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

C)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

D)AUDIO SET Adjusts the overall audio settings for this unit.

E)HDMI SET Adjusts the HDMI support audio.

Item Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input.

C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

D)DECODER MODE

Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of

this unit.

E)MULTI CH SET

Adjusts the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a

source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

MANUAL SETUP

4 OPTION MENU

Use to manually adjust the optional system settings.

Item Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the settings for the OSD and the front panel display and converts video signals.

B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.

C)AUDIO SELECT Selects the type of input signal to be used.

D)DECODER MODE

Selects whether to initialize the settings or to recall the previous settings for the input mode

selected in INPUT MENU.

E)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

F)ZONE SET

Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals on the rear panel of

this unit.

G)XM RADIO SET Adjusts the XM Satellite Radio settings.

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

You can change the MANUAL SETUP parameters while the unit

is reproducing sound.

You cannot change some MANUAL SETUP parameters while

the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press

SET MENU to enter SET MENU.

2 Press n to select MANUAL SETUP and then

press ENTER to enter the selected category.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu and

then press ENTER to enter the selected

menu item.

Repeat this operation to enter the setup mode of the

item you want to adjust.

4 Press l / h repeatedly to change the setting

of the item you want to adjust.

5 Press SET MENU (or press one of the sound

field program group buttons) to exit SET

MENU.

Using MANUAL SETUP

Note

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

SPEAKERS

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

XM MEMORY

ON SCREEN

1,5

2-4

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

SET MENU

SRCH MODE



SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

. ;MANUAL SETUP

. ;INFORMATION

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

5678

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust basic system parameters.

■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Set any THX speakers to SML (small).

LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers

according to the characteristics of your system. This

setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS

sources.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH

THX recommendation: SWFR

• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.

• Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front speakers according to the speaker settings

(even if you have previously set front speakers to

SMALL).

• Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want

to output low-frequency signals from front channels to

both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-

frequency signals from other channels are also directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use

this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using

the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.

• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The

unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front

left and right speakers.

• Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center

channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.

• Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit

directs the entire range of the center channel signal to

the center speaker.

Surround L/R speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.

This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 43) and automatically set SB L/R SP to

NONE.

• Select SML if you have small surround left and right

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/

BASS OUT.

• Select LRG if you have large surround left and right

speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the

surround speakers. The entire range of the surround

channel signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

Using BASIC MENU

Note

. A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)THX SET



1 BASIC

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. E)TEST TONE



1 BASIC

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

[SWFR FRONT BOTH

LFE/BASS OUT

[SMALL LARGE

FRONT SP

NONE [SML LRG

CENTER SP

NONE [SML LRG

SUR. L/R SP

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Surround back speakers SB L/R SP

Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE

• Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back

speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back

speakers.

• Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back

speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the left surround back

speaker.

• Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channels are directed to the speakers selected in

LFE/BASS OUT.

• Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back

speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channel are directed to the speakers selected in

LFE/BASS OUT, and the rest of the frequency signals

are directed to the left surround back speaker.

• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

• If you select LRGx1 or SMLx1, connect the speaker to the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

• NONE is automatically selected if BI-AMP is set to ON

(see page 91). This affects settings for SP LEVEL and SP

DISTANCE.

Presence speakers PRESENCE SP

Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers

connected to this unit.

Choices: NONE, YES

• Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers.

• Select YES if you have presence speakers and want to

use them.

Bass cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

THX recommendation: 80Hz

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to

adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your

subwoofer.

Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE

• Select NORMAL not to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

• Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

Priority PRIORITY

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker

set when playing sources that contain surround back

channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field

programs.

Choices: PRNS, SB

• Select PRNS to use presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channel will be output from

surround speakers.

• Select SB to use surround back speakers when a

surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA

DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output

from front speakers.

Notes

SMLx1 [SMLx2

SB L/R SP

[NONE YES

PRESENCE SP

FREQ;;;80Hz(THX)

CROSS OVER

[NORMAL REVERSE

SUBWOOFER PHASE

PRNS [SB

PRIORITY

MANUAL SETUP

■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left (or surround left) speaker and each

speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 78).

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

• FR. L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.

• FR. R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.

• CENT. adjusts the balance of the center speaker.

• SUR. L adjusts the balance of the surround left

speaker.

• SUR. R adjusts the balance of the surround right

speaker.

• SB L adjusts the balance of the surround back left

speaker.

• SB R adjusts the balance of the surround back right

speaker.

• SB adjusts the balance of the surround back speakers.

• SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.

• PR. L adjusts the balance of the presence left speaker.

• PR. R adjusts the balance of the presence right

speaker.

If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point

upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the

meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each

speaker to 75 dB.

• CENT. cannot be adjusted if CENTER SP is set to NONE (see

page 78).

• SUR. L and SUR. R cannot be adjusted if SB L/R SP is set to

NONE (see page 79).

• SB L and SB R can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to

either LRGx2 or SMLx2 (see page 79).

• SB can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx1 or

SMLx1 (see page 79).

• SWFR cannot be adjusted if LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT

(see page 78).

• PR. L and PR. R cannot be adjusted if PRESENCE SP is set to

NONE (see page 79).

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.

• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Choices: 0.3 to 24.0 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right

speaker.

• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

• SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker.

• SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker.

• SB L adjusts the distance of the surround back left

speaker.

• SB R adjusts the distance of the surround back right

speaker.

• SB adjusts the distance of the surround back speakers.

• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer.

• PRNS L adjusts the distance of the presence left

speaker.

• PRNS R adjusts the distance of the presence right

speaker.

• CENTER cannot be adjusted if CENTER SP is set to NONE

(see page 78).

• SUR. L and SUR. R cannot be adjusted if SB L/R SP is set to

NONE (see page 79).

• SB L and SB R can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to

either LRGx2 or SMLx2 (see page 79).

• SB can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx1 or

SMLx1 (see page 79).

• SWFR cannot be adjusted if LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT

(see page 78).

• PRNS L and PRNS R cannot be adjusted if PRESENCE SP is

set to NONE (see page 79).

Notes

. FR.L

FR.R

CENT.

B)SP

LEVEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

Notes

. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet

FRONTL;;;10.0ft

FRONTR;;;10.0ft

CENTER;;;;10.0ft

C)SP

DISTANCE

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ THX set D)THX SET

Use to manually adjust the THX settings.

Surround back speaker distance

SB DIST.

Use this feature to optimize the surround sound field when

you have to place the surround back L/R speakers apart.

Choices: under 0.3m, 0.3 – 1.2m, over 1.2m

(under 1ft, 1 – 4ft, over 4ft)

• Select under 0.3m (under 1ft) if the distance between

the surround back L/R speakers is less than 0.3 m (1 ft).

• Select 0.3 – 1.2m (1 – 4ft) if the distance between the

surround back L/R speakers is between 0.3 and 1.2 m

(between 1 and 4 ft).

• Select over 1.2m (over 4ft) if the distance between the

surround back L/R speakers is more than 1.2 m (4 ft).

■ Test tone E)TEST TONE

Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER

SET, SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE settings.

Choices: ON, OFF

If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arm’s length and point

upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the

meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each

speaker to 75 dB.

• This function is automatically turned off if you exit BASIC

MENU.

• If you select ON and enter the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL or

SP DISTANCE menu, the test tone is output from the selected

speakers.

Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for

video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors

or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are

set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see

page 32).

■ Graphic equalizer A)EQUALIZER

Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic

equalizer (GEQ).

Equalizer select SELECT

Choices: AUTO PEQ, GEQ, EQ OFF

• Select AUTO PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in

AUTO SETUP (see page 32).

• Select GEQ to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic

equalizer.

• Select EQ OFF to completely deactivate both PEQ and

GEQ.

• If GEQ is selected, the OSD automatically changes to the

graphic equalizer screen as shown below.

• AUTO PEQ is automatically selected if you run AUTO SETUP

(see page 32).

Graphic equalizer GEQ

Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R

and surround back L/R, surround back and presence L/R

speakers with that of the front L/R speakers.

Choices: –6 to +6 (dB)

You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz,

1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz

The GEQ parameter can be adjusted only if GEQ is selected in

SELECT.

Notes

[<]/[>]:Adjust

SB DIST.

0.3-1.2m

D)THX SET

[<]/[>]:Select

TEST TONE;;;;OFF

E)TEST TONE

Using SOUND MENU

Notes

Note

. A)EQUALIZER

B)LFE LEVEL

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

D)AUDIO SET



2 SOUND

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. E)HDMI SET



2 SOUND

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. SELECT....GEQ

A)EQUALIZER

[<]/[>]:Adjust

[ENTER]:Enter

. CHANNEL;;FRONT L

63Hz 0.0dB

160Hz 0.0dB

400Hz 0.0dB

A)EQUALIZER

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

MANUAL SETUP

Test tone TEST

Turns the test tone output on or off to compare the tonal

quality of the center, surround L/R, surround back L/R,

surround back and presence L/R speakers with that of the

front L/R speakers.

Choices: ON, OFF

■ Low-frequency effect level

B)LFE LEVEL

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-

frequency special effects which are only added to certain

scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 (dB)

Speaker LFE level SPEAKER

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone LFE level HEADPHONE

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not

be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack.

■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use to select the amount of dynamic range to be applied to

your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only

when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),

MAX (maximum)

Speaker SP

Select to adjust the dynamic range of speakers.

Headphone HP

Select to adjust the dynamic range of headphones.

• Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of

dynamic range.

■ Audio set D)AUDIO SET

Use to customize the overall audio settings for this unit.

Muting type MUTE TYPE

Use to adjust how much the muting function reduces the

sound output.

Choices: FULL, –20 dB

• Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound.

• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio Delay A.DELAY

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)

Tone bypass TONE BYPASS

Use to automatically bypass the tone control when BASS

and TREBLE are set to 0 dB.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select AUTO to automatically bypass the tone control

when BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB.

• Select OFF not to bypass the tone control at any time.

■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET

Use to adjust the HDMI support audio.

Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO

Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on

this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the

HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.

Choices: RX-V1600, OTHER

• Select RX-V1600 to play back HDMI audio signals on

this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI

IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI

component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

• Select OTHER to play back HDMI audio signals on

another HDMI component.

The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this

unit.

Note

. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

B)LFE LEVEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

. SP: MIN STD[MAX

HP: MIN STD[MAX

C)DYNAMIC RANGE

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

Note

. MUTE TYPE;;;FULL

A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms

TONE BYPASS;AUTO

LE>E

D)AUDIO SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

[<]/[>]:Adjust

SUPPORT AUDIO:

RX-V1600

E)HDMI SET

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode

or rename your inputs.

■ Input/output assignment

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your

needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the

respective jacks and effectively connect more components.

Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on

the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote

control.

The default settings are displayed with parentheses in the OSD.

Component video input CMPNT-V INPUT

Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,

V-AU X

Coaxial input COAXIAL IN

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV,

CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

Optical input OPTICAL IN

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV,

CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2

Optical output OPTICAL OUT

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV,

CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX

HDMI input HDMI IN

Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,

V-AU X

Using INPUT MENU

Note

Notes

. A)I/OASSIGNMENT

B)INPUT RENAME

C)VOLUME TRIM

D)DECODER MODE

3 INPUT

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. E)MULTI CH SET

3 INPUT

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. [A];;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[B];;;;; DTV

( DTV )

[C];;;;;CBL/SAT

(CBL/SAT)

CMPNT-V INPUT



. (1);;;;; CD

(CD)

(2);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

(3);;;;;DVR/VCR2

(DVR/VCR2)

COAXIAL IN



. (4);;;;; CD

(CD)

(5);;;;; DVD

( DVD )

(6);;;;; DTV

( DTV )

OPTICAL IN 1/2



. (7);;;;;CBL/SAT

(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL IN 2/2

. (8);;;;;MD/TAPE

(MD/TAPE)

(9);;;;; CD-R

( CD-R )

OPTICAL OUT

. IN1;;;;; DVD

( DVD )

IN2;;;;;CBL/SAT

(CBL/SAT)

HDMI IN

MANUAL SETUP

■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the

OSD and front panel display.

1 Press an input selector button to select the

input you want to change the name of.

2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

3 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

4 Press k / n to select the character you want

to use and l / h to move to the next one.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press n to change the character in the following

order, or press k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, space, 0 to 9, space, a to z, space, #, *, +,

etc.

5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each

input.

6 Press ENTER or RETURN on the remote

control to exit from the INPUT RENAME

menu.

■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM

Use to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This

is useful if you want to balance the level of each input

source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching

between input sources.

Choices: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Initial setting: 0.0 dB

You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using

this setting.

■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Use to switch the input mode. You can designate the

reassigned digital input jacks for specific audio signals

(DTS, etc.).

Choices: AUTO, DTS

• Select AUTO if you want this unit to automatically

detect input signal types and select the appropriate

input mode.

• Select DTS if you want this unit to select DTS as the

input mode.

■ Multi CH Setup E)MULTI CH SET

Use to set the direction of the signals input into the center,

subwoofer and surround channels when a source

component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

If you input 8-channel signals from an external decoder,

use this feature to select jacks for the additional front

signals.

INPUT CH

Use this setting to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder.

Choices: 6CH, 8CH

• Select 6CH if you input 6-channel signals.

• Select 8CH if you input 8-channel signals.

If ZONE2 AMP is set to SUR, PRNS or BOTH (see page 87), no

sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you

select 8CH. In this case, select 6CH and set the output setting of

the external component to 6 channels.

FRONT

If you selected 8ch in INPUT CH, you can select analog

jacks at which front signals from an external decoder will

be input.

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT,

VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX

Note

DVD -> DVD

B)INPUT RENAME

[<]/[>]:Position

[]/[]:Chara.

C)VOLUME TRIM

. PHONO 0.0dB

CD 0.0dB

CD-R 0.0dB

MD/TAPE 0.0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

Note

D)DECODER MODE

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

. CD ;;;;AUTO

DVD ;;;;AUTO

DTV ;;;;AUTO

CBL/SAT ;;;;AUTO

. INPUT CH;;;;;6CH

FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD

E)MULTI CH SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use to manually adjust the optional system settings.

■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET

Use this feature to adjust the display settings.

The parameter settings for DISPLAY SET (except for the

DIMMER setting) can be initialized to the factory presets. Use

the V-RESET feature in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see

page 91).

Dimmer DIMMER

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

Initial setting: 0

•Press h to lower the position of the OSD.

•Press l to raise the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select AUTO to display a gray background in the OSD

when there is no video signal being input.

• Select OFF not to display a gray background even

when there is no video signal being input.

Video conversion V CONV.

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the component

interlace/progressive conversion as well as the HDMI

interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video

signals input at the composite video, S-video and

component video jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to activate the component interlace/

progressive conversion as well as the HDMI interlace/

progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.

• Select OFF to deactivate the component interlace/

progressive conversion as well as the HDMI interlace/

progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.

When using the THX system, we recommend setting V CONV. to

OFF.

• The OSD is not displayed when V CONV. is set to OFF.

• Even when V CONV. is set to ON, HDMI digital signals are not

converted to analog video signals.

• If V CONV. is set to OFF, the CMPNT I/P and HDMI I/P

features are deactivated.

• Converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (composite or S-video) between each component.

• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a

VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer

depending on your VCR.

• Unconventional signals input at the composite video, S-video or

component video jacks cannot be converted even if V CONV. is

set to ON.

• If unconventional signals are being input at the composite

video, S-video or component video jacks, the video output may

be abnormal as a result. In such cases, set V CONV. to OFF.

Component interlace/progressive conversion

CMPNT I/P

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog I/P

conversion of the analog video signals input at the

composite video, S-video and component video jacks so

that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i to

480p are output at the MONITOR OUT jacks.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to activate the analog I/P conversion of the

analog video signals.

• Select OFF to deactivate the analog I/P conversion of

the analog video signals.

• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the

OSD if V CONV. is set to OFF.

• If your video monitor does not support the analog video signals

with 480p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be

displayed on your video monitor when CMPNT I/P is set to

ON.

Using OPTION MENU

Note

. A)DISPLAYSET

B)MEMORY GUARD

C)AUDIO SELECT

D)DECODER MODE

OPTION

MENU 1/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. E)PARAM. INI

F)ZONE SET

G)XM RADIO SET

OPTION

MENU 2/2

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

. DIMMER;;;;;;;0

OSD SHIFT;;;;0

GRAY BACK;AUTO

V CONV.;;;;;ON

A)DISPLAY SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

Notes

MANUAL SETUP

HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion

HDMI I/P

Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI I/P up-

conversion of the analog video signals input at the

composite video, S-video and component video jacks so

that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i to

480p are output at the HDMI OUT jack.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to activate the HDMI I/P up-conversion of

the analog video signals.

• Select OFF to deactivate the HDMI I/P up-conversion

of the analog video signals.

• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the

OSD if V CONV. is set to OFF.

• When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution

are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack,

the picture quality may worsen.

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to protect the following system parameters.

– DSP program parameters

– All SET MENU items except MEMORY GUARD

– All speaker levels

– The on-screen display (OSD) mode

• Select OFF to deactivate the memory guard feature.

• When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use the test

tone or select any other SET MENU items.

• When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, “MEMORY

GUARD!” appears in the OSD and in the front panel display

when you try to adjust the protected system parameters.

■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT

Use this feature to designate the default input mode for the

input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate input mode.

• Select LAST if you want this unit to automatically

select the last input mode used for the connected input

source.

Selecting LAST does not recall the last setting for the EXTD

SUR. button.

■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE

Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for

the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks

when you turn on the power of this unit. See page 43 for

details about the input mode.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO to if you want this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signals and select the

appropriate decoder mode.

• Select LAST to if you want this unit to automatically

select the last decoder mode used for the connected

input source.

Selecting LAST does not recall the last setting for the EXTD

SUR. button.

Notes

[ON OFF

B)MEMORY GUARD

[<]/[>]:Adjust

Note

[AUTO LAST

C)AUDIO SELECT

[<]/[>]:Adjust



[AUTO LAST

D)DECODER MODE

[<]/[>]:Adjust



MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Parameter initialization E)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field

program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) next to a program name means that the

parameter values have been changed from their initial

settings.

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a

sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual

sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY

GUARD is set to ON.

■ Zone set F)ZONE SET

Speakers B SP B

Use to specify the location of speakers connected the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: MAIN, ZONE B

• Select MAIN to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when

the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals

are set in the main room.

• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is

turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

• If you select ZONE B and connect headphones to the PHONES

jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and

SPEAKERS B.

• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Zone 2 volume ZONE2 VOL

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.

Choices: VAR, FIX

• Select VAR to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume

simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote

control.

• Select FIX to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level

to a standard line level.

Zone 3 volume ZONE3 VOL

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks.

Choices: VAR, FIX

• Select VAR to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume

simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote

control.

• Select FIX to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level

to a standard line level.

Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP

Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified.

Choices: EXT, SUR, PRNS, BOTH

• Select EXT if you want to connect your Zone 2

speakers through an external amplifier connected to the

ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select SUR to use the internal surround amplifier of

this unit if you want to connect your Zone 2 speakers

directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select PRNS to use the internal surround back

amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone

2 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select BOTH to use the internal surround and surround

back amplifiers of this unit if you want to connect your

Zone 2 speakers directly to both the PRESENCE/

ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu,

SUR, PRNS and BOTH cannot be selected.

• Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same

time. If BOTH is selected for ZONE2 AMP, for instance, only

EXT can be selected for ZONE3 AMP and vice versa.

• The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes

in effect in the following cases so that the surround and

surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned

to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers

connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the

7.1-channel system.

– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to PRNS and

EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off

– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to EXT and

PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off

• If either ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP is set to SUR or PRNS,

the speaker system of the main room is limited to 3.1 or

2.1-channel playback no matter when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is

turned off because the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals are used for the zone connection.

Notes

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAINMENT

MOVIE THEATER

*SURROUND

PRESS DSP KEY

E)PARAM. INI

SP B;;;;;;;;MAIN

ZONE2 VOL;;;;VAR

ZONE3 VOL;;;;VAR

ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT

F)ZONE SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

Notes

MANUAL SETUP

Zone 3 amplifier ZONE3 AMP

Use to select how the ZONE 3 speakers will be amplified.

Choices: EXT, SUR, PRNS, BOTH

• Select EXT if you want to connect your Zone 3

speakers through an external amplifier connected to the

ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select SUR to use the internal surround amplifier of

this unit if you want to connect your Zone 3 speakers

directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select PRNS to use the internal surround back

amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone

3 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3)

speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• Select BOTH to use the internal surround and surround

back amplifiers of this unit if you want to connect your

Zone 3 speakers directly to both the PRESENCE/

ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals on the rear panel of this unit.

• If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu,

SUR, PRNS and BOTH cannot be selected.

• Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same

time. If BOTH is selected for ZONE2 AMP, for instance, only

EXT can be selected for ZONE3 AMP and vice versa.

• The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes

in effect in the following cases so that the surround and

surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned

to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers

connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the

7.1-channel system.

– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to PRNS and

EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off

– When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to EXT and

PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off

• If either ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP is set to SUR or PRNS,

the speaker system of the main room is limited to 3.1 or

2.1-channel playback no matter when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is

turned off because the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals are used for the zone connection.

■ XM Satellite Radio set G)XM RADIO SET

Use this feature to adjust the XM Satellite Radio settings.

Display DISPLAY

Use this feature if you want to display the XM Satellite

Radio information in the OSD for a certain amount of

time.

Choices: ON, 10S, 30S, OFF

• Select ON to display the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD.

• Select 10S to set the amount of time for the XM

Satellite Radio information to be displayed for 10

seconds.

• Select 30S to set the amount of time for the XM

Satellite Radio information to be displayed for 30

seconds.

• Select OFF not to display the XM Satellite Radio

information in the OSD.

Antenna ANTENNA

Use this feature if you want to display the XM Satellite

Radio reception level.

Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%

• If the displayed percentage of the reception level is

below the average (approximately 60%), you need to

adjust the orientation of the XM Satellite Radio

antenna for a better percentage of the reception level.

• If NONE is displayed, the XM Satellite Radio antenna

may not be firmly connected to the XM jack on the rear

panel of this unit. Check the XM Satellite Radio

connection.

The ANTENNA parameter cannot be adjusted by using the

remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the

XM Satellite Radio antenna for a better percentage of the

reception level.

Notes

Note

. XM DISPLAY;;;10S

XM ANTENNA;;NONE

G)XM RADIO SET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can switch between the available OSD modes and manually adjust the output level of each speaker.

You can display the operating information of this unit on a

video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound

field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much

easier to see the available options and parameters than it is

to read the information in the front panel display.

Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit

and then press ON SCREEN on the remote

control repeatedly to change the OSD mode.

The OSD mode changes in the following order:

Full display → Short display → Display off

Full display

Fully shows the sound field program parameter settings as

well as the contents of the front panel display.

Short display

Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the

bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit.

Display off

Only the operations performed using ON SCREEN on the

remote control are displayed. However, the OSD is

displayed when using SET MENU or the test tone feature

even if the OSD mode is turned off.

• The OSD signal is not output at the OUT (REC) jack and will

not be recorded.

• You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is no

video signal being input by setting GRAY BACK to AUTO

(see page 85).

• The OSD is not displayed in the following cases:

– When video signals in the progressive format or HDTV video

signals are being input.

– When the signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack

are being output at the HDMI OUT jack.

– When V CONV. is set to OFF (see page 85).

You can manually adjust the output level of each speaker

while listening to a music source. This is also possible

when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks.

This operation will override the level adjustments made in AUTO

SETUP (see page 32) and SP LEVEL (see page 80).

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker you want to adjust.

FRONT L adjusts the front left speaker level.

CENTER adjusts the center speaker level.

FRONT R adjusts the front right speaker level.

SUR.R adjusts the surround right speaker level.

SB R adjusts the surround back right speaker level.

SB L adjusts the surround back left speaker level.

SUR.L adjusts the surround left speaker level.

SWFR adjusts the subwoofer level.

PRNS L adjusts the presence left speaker level.

PRNS R adjusts the presence right speaker level.

3 Press l / h to adjust the speaker output

level.

Control range: +10 dB to –10 dB

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Selecting the OSD mode

Notes

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

Full display

Short display

Display off

MUSIC

P.INIT.DLY;;21ms

P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;31ms

S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0

Pop/Rock

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

MUSIC

Pop/Rock

Full display Short display

Adjusting speaker levels

Note

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

VOLUME

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

XM MEMORY

ON SCREEN

(U.S.A. model)

AMP

SOURCE

BAND

LEVEL

TITLE

ADVANCED SETUP

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The ADVANCED SETUP menu offers

additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold

under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.

1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to set

this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby

mode.

2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the

front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF

inward to the ON position to turn on the

power of this unit.

3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front

panel to select the parameter you want to

adjust.

The name of the selected parameter appears in the

front panel display.

See pages 90 and 91 for a complete list of available

parameters.

4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel repeatedly to change the setting.

5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to

release it outward to the OFF position to save

the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and

Zone 3 to the standby mode.

The new setting is activated next time you press

MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on the

power of this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3.

• The control buttons on the remote control and VOLUME as

well as the other control buttons on the front panel except

MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the

PROGRAM selector are ineffective while you are using the

ADVANCED SETUP menu.

• Zone 2, Zone 3 and the speaker relay are all turned off and all

audio and video output is muted while you are using the

ADVANCED SETUP menu.

• The ADVANCED SETUP menu is only available in the front

panel display.

■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.

Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that

of your speakers.

Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN

• Select 6ΩMIN for speakers with 6 ohms or higher.

• Select 8ΩMIN for speakers with 8 ohms or higher.

■ User preset PRESET

Use to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial

factory settings with the exception of System Memory and

AUTO SETUP settings.

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select CANCEL if you do not want to reset the

parameters of this unit.

• Select RESET to reset the parameters of this unit.

• This setting does not affect the ADVANCED SETUP menu

item parameters.

• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on

the power of this unit.

ADVANCED SETUP

Using ADVANCED SETUP

MASTER

OFF

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MASTER

OFF

PROGRAM

SP IMP.-8 MIN

ADVANCED SETUP

Current settingName of the selected parameter

Notes

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MASTER

OFF

ADVANCED SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Remote sensor REMOTE SEN

Use to activate or deactivate the signal-receiving

capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel

of this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON if you want to activate the signal-receiving

capability of the remote control sensor.

• Select OFF if you want to deactivate the signal-

receiving capability of the remote control sensor.

We recommend setting this parameter to ON in most cases.

■ Wake on RS-232C access WAKE ON 232C

Use to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C

interface when this unit is in the standby mode.

Choices: Y (yes), N (no)

• Select Y set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C

interface.

• Select N set this unit not to transmit data via the

RS-232C interface.

■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP

Use to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control

recognition (see page 95).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select ID1 when the remote control AMP library code

is set to 2001.

• Select ID2 when the remote control AMP library code

is set to 2002.

You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the

remote control.

■ Remote control tuner ID REMOTE TUN

Use to set the tuner ID of this unit for remote control

recognition (see page 95).

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select ID1 when the remote control tuner library code

is set to 2602.

• Select ID2 when the remote control tuner library code

is set to 2603.

You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the

remote control.

■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM

(U.S.A. model only)

Use to switch the XM-related remote control codes

between ID1 and ID2.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select ID1 when the remote control XM library code is

set to 2604.

• Select ID2 when the remote control XM library code is

set to 2605.

You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the

remote control.

■ Fan operation mode FAN MODE

Use to set the operation of the cooling fan of this unit.

Choices: AUTO, CONT.

• Select AUTO to set the fan to operate automatically

according to the temperature of this unit.

• Select CONT. to set the fan to operate continuously

regardless of the temperature of this unit.

■ Tuner frequency step TU

(Asia and General models only)

Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the

frequency spacing in your area.

Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50

• Select AM10/FM100 for North, Central and South

America.

• Select AM9/FM50 for all other areas.

■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP

Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON if you want to activate the bi-AMP function.

• Select OFF if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP

function.

When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SURROUND BACK terminals

cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the

SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP

connection (see page 19).

■ Video reset V-RESET

Use to initialize the parameter settings for DISPLAY SET

in OPTION MENU (see page 85). This feature is useful if

the SET MENU items are not displayed on your video

monitor due to a technical error between the CMPNT I/P

setting and the capability of your video monitor. That is, if

your video monitor does not support the analog video

signals with 480p of resolution, the SET MENU items

may not be displayed on your video monitor when

CMPNT I/P is set to ON (see page 85).

Choices: YES, CANCEL

The parameter setting for DIMMER is not initialized (see

page 85).

Note

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by

YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the

appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire

functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the

AMP mode.

■ Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the

selected component appears in the display window.

■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area)

OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently

from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro

function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code.

To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window.

You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 96 to program buttons operated within this component control area.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

1 2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET/CH

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

SET MENU

The buttons inside

the dotted lines

control this unit in

any mode (POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, AUDIO

SEL, the input

selector buttons,

VOLUME +/–,

MUTE,

STRAIGHT

(EFFECT) and

PURE DIRECT).

AMP/SOURCE/

Set to AMP to

operate this unit.

Display

window

(U.S.A. model)

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

EXIT

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

PRG SELECT

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

TOP

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

1 2B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SELECT

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

PRESET

FREQ/RDS

EON

MODE

PTY SEEK

START

REC

DISC SKIP

RETURN

DISPLAY

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

1 2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

–

SPEAKERSMEMORY

ON SCREEN

PRESET/CH

XM MEMORY

SET MENU

Component

control area

You can control up

to 14 different

components by

setting appropriate

remote control

codes (see page 94).

The A and input

selector buttons

switch the function

of the component

control area below.

Use the A buttons

to control other

components

regardless of whether

they are connected to

this unit.

Factory setting:

A...Tape deck

Display

window

AMP/

SOURCE/

Set to

SOURCE to

operate the

component

selected with

an input

selector

button.

Set to TV to

operate the

television

(you must set

the remote

control code

in DTV or

PHONO).

SELECT k / n

switches control to

another component

without changing

the input source on

this unit.

(U.S.A. model)

Note

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you

can use this remote to control your other components.

Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the

selected component. Use the input selector buttons to

select the component you want to operate. The remote

control automatically switches to the appropriate control

mode for that component.

This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.

These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO.

When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.

These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.

Controlling each component

FREQ/RDSFREQ/RDS EONEON MODEMODE PTY SEEKPTY SEEK STARTSTART

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

SPEAKERSMEMORY

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A/B/C/D/E

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

VOLUME

–

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

(U.S.A. model)

DVD player/

DVD recorder

VCR

Cable TV/

Satellite tuner

TV LD player CD player

MD recorder/

CD recorder

Tape deck Tuner

1 AV P O W E R

Power

VCR power

Power

2 TV POWER

TV power

Power

TV power

3 TV VOL +

TV volume +

Volume +

TV volume +

TV VOL –

TV volume –

Volume –

TV volume –

CH +

TV channel +

Channel + Channel + Channel +

TV channel +

CH –

TV channel –

Channel – Channel – Channel –

TV channel –

TV INPUT

TV input

Input

TV input

TV MUTE

TV mute

Mute

TV mute

4 TITLE

Title Title Title Title Band

5 MENU

Menu Menu Menu

6 ENTER

Menu enter Menu select Menu select

k Menu up Menu up Menu up

Preset up

(1 to 8)

n Menu down Menu down Menu down

Preset down

(1 to 8)

l Menu left Menu left Menu left

Preset down

(A to E)

h Menu right Menu right Menu right Direction A/B

Preset up

(A to E)

7 RETURN

Return Return Return Return

8 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons

9 ll

backward

VCR search

backward

VCR search

backward

hh Search forward Search forward

VCR search

forward

VCR search

forward

Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward

b Skip backward

Chapter/Skip

backward

Skip backward Skip backward Direction back

a Skip forward

Chapter/Skip

forward

Skip forward Skip forward

Direction

forward

REC/

DISC SKIP

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec

VCR rec

Disc skip Rec Rec

s Stop Stop

VCR stop

Stop Stop Stop Stop

e Pause Pause

VCR pause

Pause Pause Pause Pause

h Play Play

VCR play

Play Play Play Play

0 AUDIO

Audio Audio

A DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display

B ENTER

Enter Enter/recall

Enter/

numeric button

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available remote

control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL

CODES” at the end of this manual.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each input area.

Remote control code default settings

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.

In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to set up.

3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the selected

component name (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the

display window.

If you want to setup for another component, press the input

selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component.

• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,

otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

4 If you want to change a library (component

category), press l / h. You can set a

different type of component.

Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD,

L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),

L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite),

L;VCR

• The tuner library (L;TUN) code is preset in the TUNER

and XM buttons in order to operate this unit. The initial

settings for the TUNER and XM buttons are 2602 and

2604 respectively. However, you can switch the tuner

library code by entering one of the following codes if

necessary.

• The AMP library (L;AMP) code is preset to 2001 in order

to operate this unit. However, you can switch the AMP

library code by entering one of the following codes if

necessary.

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Library

(component

category)

Default YAMAHA

code

ATAPE2700

XM TUNER 2604

PHONO TV –

TUNER TUNER 2602

CD CD 2300

MULTI CH

INPUT

DVD 2102

V-AUX VCR –

CBL/SAT CABLE –

MD/TAPE MD 2500

CD-R CD-R 2400

DTV TV –

VCR 1 VCR –

DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807

DVD DVD 2102

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

Notes

LEARN

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Setting remote control AMP codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

AMP code for the component you want to use.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE and then

change the remote control code settings.

• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID

(see page 91).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

Setting remote control tuner codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

tuner code for the component you want to use.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and press TUNER

on the remote control to select TUNER as the input source

and then change the remote control code settings.

• You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID

(see page 91).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

Setting remote control XM codes

Select one of the following codes to set the remote control

XM code for the component you want to use.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and press XM on the

remote control to select XM as the input source and then

change the remote control code settings.

• You need to set the corresponding remote control XM ID

(see page 91).

• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you

may be able to operate the other components

simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,

set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit

separately.

5 Press ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected component

appears in the display window.

0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set.

6 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

four-digit remote control code for the

component you want to use.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

7 Press ENTER to set the number.

OK appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

NG appears in the display window if the setting was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press the input selector button or

SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4

through 6.

AMP library

code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control

AMP ID

(this unit’s

setting:

see page 91)

2001

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3

features (see page 104).

ID1

(initial setting)

2002

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3

features (see page 104).

ID2

Notes

Tuner

library code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control

tuner ID

(this unit’s

setting:

see page 91)

2602

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2603

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

Notes

XM library

code

(remote

control

setting)

Function

Remote

control XM

(this unit’s

setting:

see page 91)

2604

(initial setting)

To operate this unit using

the default code.

ID1

(initial setting)

2605

To operate this unit using an

alternative code.

ID2

Notes

Note

2 B

THX

STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.

STEREO

MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

SPEAKERSMEMORY

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

8 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

9 Press one of the buttons shaded below to

see if you can control your component. If you

can, the remote control code is correct.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than

one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the Learn feature (see “Using LEARN”)

or use the remote control supplied with the component.

• Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over

remote control code functions.

You can program remote control codes from other remote

controls. Use the LEARN feature if you want to program

functions not included in the basic operations covered by

the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control

code is not available. You can program any of the buttons

available in the component control area (see page 92). The

buttons can be programmed independently for each

component.

This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most

of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some

special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the

operating instructions for the other remote control.)

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select a

source component.

3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm

(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other.

Notes

LEARN

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS

EON

MODE

PTY SEEK

START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

(U.S.A. model)

Using LEARN

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

(U.S.A. model)

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

(U.S.A. model)

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

LEARN and the selected component name (ex. DVD)

appear alternately in the display window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control

code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

5 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

LEARN appears in the display window.

6 Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until OK

appears in the display window.

NG appears in the display window if learning was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5

and 6.

• If you continuously want to program another function for

another component, press SELECT k / n to select the

component, then repeat steps 5 and 6.

7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning

mode.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than

one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, FULL may appear

in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case,

clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for

further learning.

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– When the distance between the two remote controls is too

great or too small.

– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each

other at the appropriate angle.

– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– When the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

Notes

LEARN

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

BAND

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOLUME

–

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

XM MEMORY

(U.S.A. model)

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

LEARN

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can change the name of the input source that appears

in the display window on the remote control if you want to

use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful

when you have set the input selector to control a different

component.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press RE-NAME again.

4 Press k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing n changes the character as follows:

A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),

/ (slash), and space.

(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)

5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next

position.

6 Press ENTER to set the new name.

OK appears in the display window if renaming was

successful.

NG appears in the display window if renaming was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

If you continuously want to rename another component,

press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select

the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.

7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming

mode.

ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one

button simultaneously.

Using RE-NAME

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

(U.S.A. model)

RE-NAME

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

Note

A-E/CAT.

ENTER

PRESET/CH

RE-NAME

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The MACRO feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,

when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button

to start playback. The MACRO feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.

The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(see page 100).

You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC

OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.

For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)

When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 94), you can turn on the power of your TV

without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.

When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.

Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD

recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that

component (see page 96) or set a remote control code (see page 94).

Using MACRO

Macro buttons First Second Third

—

(*1)

—

(CD area) (*4)

—

(MD/TAPE area) (*4)

(CD-R area) (*4)

—

(VCR 1 area) (*4)

(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)

(DVD area) (*4)

POWER

(CD area)

Press a macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order

STANDBY

POWER POWER

(*1)

POWER

(*2)

PHONO

POWER

PHONO

TUNER

(*3)

MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN

AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

100

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ MACRO operations

1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

2 Press a macro button.

• When you have finished using the MACRO feature, set

MACRO ON/OFF to OFF.

• While the remote is carrying out a MACRO program, it will not

accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is

complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

■ Programming MACRO operations

You can program your own macro and use the MACRO

feature to transmit several remote control commands in

sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote

control codes or perform learning operations before

programming the macro. We do not recommend

programming continuous operations such as volume

control in a macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3 Press the macro button you want to use to

operate the macro.

The macro button name (ex. M;DVD) and the

selected component name (ex. DVD) appear

alternately in the display window.

AGAIN appears in the display window if you press a button

other than a macro button.

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS

EON

MODE

PTY SEEK

START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

MACROMACRO ON/OFF

Macro buttons

(U.S.A. model)

Notes

Note

AMP

SOURCE

MACRO

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

(U.S.A. model)

101

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, FULL appears and the remote

control automatically exits the macro mode.

To change the selected source component, press

SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will

program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes

the selected component and corresponding component control

area.

5 Press MACRO again when the operation

sequence you want to program is complete.

ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and

setup remote control codes.

■ Basic CLEAR operations

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

CLEAR appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press CLEAR again.

3 Press k / n to select the clear mode.

L;CD Clears all learned functions in the respective

component control area. Press an input selector

button to select the component.

L;AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control

area.

L;ALL Clears all learned functions.

M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.

RNAME Clears all renamed source names.

FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote

to the factory settings.

The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;).

4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

WAIT appears in the display window. If clearing was

successful, C;OK appears in the display window.

Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the

button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer

setting, if you have set remote control codes).

L;ALL and FCTRY may take about 30 seconds to complete.

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost

in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet for more than one week.

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER

POWER

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

Indicates the

number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can

set the next step

MCR 1: DVD

MCR 2: AV POWER

MCR 3: AUDIO SEL

(U.S.A. model)

Using CLEAR

Note

AMP

SOURCE

CLEAR

102

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

5 Release the object used to press CLEAR to

exit from the clearing mode.

• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one

button simultaneously.

■ Clearing a learned function

You can clear the function learned for a certain button in

each control area.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component containing the function

you want to clear.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

LEARN and the selected component name

(ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote

control code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object and then press the button

you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was

successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 4.

• If you continuously want to clear another function for

another component, press SELECT k / n to select the

component, then repeat step 4.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

5 Release the object used to press CLEAR to

exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the learning mode.

6 Press LEARN again to exit.

• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one

button simultaneously.

Notes

CLEAR

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

(U.S.A. model)

LEARN

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS

EON

MODE

PTY SEEK

START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

(U.S.A. model)

103

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Clearing a macro function

You can clear the function programmed for a certain

macro button.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object, then press the macro

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was

successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 3.

• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts

to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you

have set remote control codes).

4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the macro

programming mode.

5 Press MACRO again to exit.

• C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

• ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one

button simultaneously.

Note

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

MACRO

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

(U.S.A. model)

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

104

This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit

to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control

this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.

• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second

and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.

• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not

need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.

■ Using the external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select EXT in ZONE2 AMP (see page 87).

• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the

amplifier in the second/third room.

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

• The REMOTE IN jack can be used for either Zone 2 or Zone 3 but cannot be used for both Zone 2 and Zone 3 at the same time.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third

room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.

Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components

Notes

OUTOUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

This unit

YAMAHA

component

YAMAHA

component

Infrared signal

receiver

REMOTE OUT

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

MONITOR OUT

SP OUT

REMOTE IN

ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT

REMOTE IN

MAIN

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

Infrared emitter

DVD player

(or other component)

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second room Third roomMain room

SYSTEM

This unit

105

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit

If you want to use one internal amplifier (surround or surround back) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals and select either SUR or PRNS for ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP (see pages 87 and 88).

If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both surround and surround back) of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) and PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker

terminals and select BOTH for ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP (see pages 87 and 88).

You can select the zone you want to control by using the

control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.

Once the zone you want to control is selected, you can

control the selected zone as described in “Controlling

Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 106.

■ Front panel operations

1 Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF

or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel to

individually turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone

Press each button repeatedly to turn on the respective

zone or set it to the standby mode.

Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed

inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER and

STANDBY on the remote control to turn on this unit, Zone

2 and Zone 3 simultaneously.

2 Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel

repeatedly to select the zone you want to

control.

Each time you press ZONE CONTROL, the front

panel display changes as shown below, and the

indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for

approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator

flashes when this unit is selected.

ZONE2

Controls the Zone 2 component connected to the

ZONE 2 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this

unit.

ZONE3

Controls the Zone 3 component connected to the

ZONE 3 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this

unit.

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a

Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel.

Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low

impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.

Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This

information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.

–

PRESENCE/ ZONE 2(3)

SINGLE

–

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND/ZONE 2(3)

Second room

This unit

Third room

Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3

ZONE 2

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 3

ON/OFF

ZONE CONTROL

ZONE2

ZONE3

No indicator flashes when this unit is selected.

106

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the

selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,

the currently selected zone mode is automatically

canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROL again.

• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3

are turned on.

3 Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3”

on page 106 for detailed information on the

Zone 2 and Zone 3 control functions.

■ Remote control operations

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV on the remote control

to AMP.

2 Press SELECT k repeatedly to select the

zone you want to control.

ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 is displayed in the display

window.

3 Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3”

for detailed information on the Zone 2 and

Zone 3 control functions.

4 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the

Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.

• The input source of Zone 2 and the source available for

recording are always the same.

• ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 appears in the display window only

when k is pressed, and ALL appears only when n is

pressed.

Once the zone you want to control is selected as described

in “Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 105, you can

control Zone 2 and Zone 3 by using the control buttons on

the front panel or on the remote control. The available

operations are listed as follows:

• Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3

• Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3

• Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3

• Tuning into FM or AM when TUNER is selected as the

input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3

• Tuning into the XM Satellite Radio when XM is

selected as the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3

■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Use the INPUT selector on the front panel (or

press one of the input selector buttons on the

remote control) to select the input source of the

selected zone.

If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:

name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the

selected input source” is displayed in the display window

when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected respectively.

• Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER

features in the selected zone. For details about the

TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on

page 46.

• Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite

Radio features in the selected zone. For details about

the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM®

SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 52.

The selected input source is shared across all zones.

You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected

zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently

selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press

ZONE CONTROL on the front panel again.

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

SELECT

Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3

Note

INPUT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

(U.S.A. model)

107

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME

+/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume level of the

selected zone.

Control range: –80 dB to +16.5 dB

Control step: 0.5 dB

VOLUME +/– can be used only when ZONE2 VOL or ZONE3

VOL is set to VAR in ZONE SET (see page 87).

Press MUTE to mute the sound output to the selected zone.

■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or

Zone 3

Press CH +/– and TV VOL +/– on the remote control to

adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) and the

low-frequency response (BASS) respectively.

Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB

Control step: 2 dB

Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display

window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality

of the corresponding zone (see page 106).

You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using

TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting

the tonal quality” on page 38.

POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work

differently depending on the selected zone that appears in

the display window.

• When the normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected,

you can turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them

to the standby mode individually.

• When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns

on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously and

pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode

simultaneously.

In the normal mode, MAIN appears for a few seconds when

POWER or STANDBY is pressed.

Note

VOLUME

–

VOLUME

TV VOL

–

Using the control mode of Zone 2

and Zone 3

Control mode LCD display

POWER

and

STANDBY

Normal mode

Name of component

Turns on the main

unit only or sets it to

the standby mode.

Zone 2 mode

“ZONE 2” or “2:name

of the selected

component”

Turns on Zone 2 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

Zone 3 mode

“ZONE 3” or “3:name

of the selected

component”

Turns on Zone 3 or

sets it to the standby

mode.

All mode

“ALL”

POWER: turns on

the main unit, Zone 2

and Zone 3.

STANDBY: sets the

main unit, Zone 2

and Zone 3 to the

standby mode.

Note

HDMI

108

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/

video) interface.

Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a

set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor

(such as a digital television – DTV), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as

multi-channel digital audio using a single cable.

HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports

8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure

audio/video interface that meets the security requirements

of content providers and system operators.

For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website

at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

• Analog audio signals input at the audio input jacks other than

the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the

HDMI OUT jack. However, analog video signals input at the

composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be

up-converted to HDMI so that the digitally up-converted video

signals can be output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 86).

• Connect the HDMI OUT jack of other components (such as a

DVD player) to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit.

Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack of other components (such as a projector).

• You need a commercially available HDMI cable to connect this

unit to other HDMI components. Use an HDMI cable shorter

than 5 m (15 ft) to ensure stable operations and to prevent losses

of video quality.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.

• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

• This unit is not compatible with multi-stereo area audio signals

of Super Audio CDs. You can connect devices (such as a DVD

player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

• When connected to a DVD player, audio signals may not be

output depending on the type of the DVD player. In case the

DVD player connected to this unit does not output DVD multi-

channel audio signals at the HDMI OUT jack, connect the DVD

player to the analog multi-channel audio input jacks.

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio plays back, video and

audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the

DVD player.

• Video and audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2

jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is

set to the standby mode or the power is turned off.

• When connecting other HDMI components to this unit, refer to

the instruction manuals for those components.

• When HDMI audio signals are output from components like a

DVD player, the audio signal format (such as sampling

frequencies) may be restricted depending on the HDMI video

signal format.

• Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from this unit or

turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI components connected to

the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred.

Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.

• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI

connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio signals being

input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI

indicator flashes irregularly and HDCP ERROR appears in the

front panel display as if the DVI monitors do not support the

HDCP copy protection standards.

■ HDMI compatibility with this unit

HDMI

What is HDMI?

This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following

standards:

• HDMI 1.1 (High-Definition Multimedia Interface

Specification Version 1.1) licensed by HDMI

Licensing, LLC.

• HDCP 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital

Content Protection, LLC.

Notes

Audio signal

types

Audio signal

formats

Compatible

HDMI

components

2ch Linear

PCM

2ch, 32-192 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video,

DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch

Linear PCM

5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz,

16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital,

DTS

DVD-Video, etc.

109

HDMI

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Assigning HDMI components

You can assign an HDMI component to the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack on the rear panel of this unit so that the

audio and video signals input via HDMI connection can

be simultaneously played back.

Use the HDMI IN parameter in INPUT MENU to assign

HDMI components (see page 83).

■ Converting analog video signals to

HDMI

This unit is equipped with the HDMI interlace/progressive

up-conversion feature where the analog video signals

input at the composite video, S-video and component

video jacks on the rear panel of this unit are digitally

processed and up-converted so that they can be output at

the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit with all-

digital resolution quality.

Use the HDMI I/P parameter in OPTION MENU to

convert analog component video signals to HDMI

(see page 86).

When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution

are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the

picture quality may worsen.

■ Setting the HDMI support audio

You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this

unit or on another HDMI component connected to the

HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit.

Use the HDMI SET parameter in SOUND MENU to set

the HDMI support audio (see page 82).

Perform the following steps to listen to playback from an

HDMI component.

If an error message appears in the front panel display,

see page 116 for a complete list of error messages and proper

remedies.

1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel

(or press one of the input selector buttons on

the remote control) to select the input source

assigned to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack

on the rear panel of this unit.

2 Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or

AUDIO SEL on the remote control repeatedly

to select AUTO or HDMI as the input mode.

The following front panel displays are examples

where DVD is selected as the input source.

3 Start playback on the connected HDMI

component.

Setting the HDMI parameters

Note

Basic HDMI operations

Note

INPUT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

AUDIO SEL

Front panel Remote control

(U.S.A. model)

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

A.SEL: AUTO

INPUT: DVD

V-AUX

VOLUME

L R

VCR 1

DTV DVD CD-R CD

TUNERPHONO

MD/TAPECBL/SATDVR/VCR 2

A.SEL: HDMI

INPUT: DVD

AUDIO SEL

AUDIO SELECT

Front panel Remote control

TROUBLESHOOTING

110

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn

on when MAIN ZONE

ON/OFF on the front

panel (or POWER on

the remote control) is

pressed, or enters in

the standby mode

soon after the power

has been turned on.

The power cable is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cable firmly.

—

The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use

it normally.

—

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

20–28

The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.

—

The input mode is set to HDMI, COAX/

OPT or ANALOG.

Set the input mode to AUTO.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,

MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons on

the remote control.

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The front speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the front speakers by pressing

SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by pressing

SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control).

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

The input mode is set to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS

signal.

Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT.

The signals this unit cannot reproduce (a

CD-ROM, for example) are being

received from a source component.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP

copy protection standards.

—

SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and

HDMI audio signals are not being played

back on this unit.

Set SUPPORT AUDIO to RX-V1600 in MANUAL

SETUP.

No picture V CONV. is set to OFF. Set V CONV. to ON.

Video signals in the progressive format or

HDTV video signals are being input.

The signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or

HDMI IN 2 jack are being output at the

HDMI OUT jack.

111

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect balance settings in the OSD

menu.

Adjust the SP LEVEL settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound from the

effect speakers

The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

No sound from the

center speaker

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

CENTER SP is set to NONE in

SPEAKER SET.

Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

7ch Stereo) has been selected.

Try another sound field program.

No sound from the

surround speakers

The output level of the surround speakers

is set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround speakers.

SUR. L/R SP is set to NONE in

SPEAKER SET.

Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and

right speakers.

A monaural or stereo source is being

played with STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound

fields.

—

No sound from the

surround back

speakers

Presence speakers are selected. Select SB in PRIORITY.

SUR. L/R SP is set to NONE in

SPEAKER SET.

If the surround left and right speakers are set to

NONE, surround back speakers are automatically set

to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the

surround left and right speakers.

SB L/R SP is set to NONE in SPEAKER

SET.

Select SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1 or LRGx2.

No sound from the

subwoofer

LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT when a

Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being

played.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

LFE/BASS OUT is set to SWFR or

FRONT when a 2-channel source is being

played.

Select BOTH.

The source does not contain low bass

signals.

112

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operations

instructions for your component.

—

The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT.

A humming sound

can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the

GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while playing a

record.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The turntable should be connected to this unit through

an MC-head amplifier.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to this

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

20–27

Some components cannot record the

Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT jacks.

The source component is not connected to

the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

20–27

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

MEMORY GUARD is set to ON. Select OFF.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and

then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

CHECK SP WIRES

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio-

frequency equipment,

or this unit.

This unit is too close to the digital or

radio-frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

enters the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and

then turn it back on.

—

113

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Tuner

■ XM Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for the best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats and other electrical

equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

—

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.

—

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK ANTENNA

The XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory is not connected, or does not

work properly.

Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory connections.

UPDATING

The XM user encryption code is being

updated.

Wait until the encryption code is updated.

—

NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak.

Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna

accessory connections and orient it for the best

reception.

It takes longer than four seconds for audio

or text data to be decoded.

Wait until the decoding process has finished.

—

OFF AIR

The XM Satellite Radio channel you

selected is not currently broadcasting any

signal.

Check the channel number again or select another

XM Satellite Radio channel.

<XM> - - -

The channel Station ID (SID) is no longer

available.

- - - / - - -

No artist name/feature or song/program

title is available.

<CAT> - - -

No channels are available for the selected

category.

Select another channel category by pressing

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote

control) repeatedly.

114

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control

does not work or

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.

When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.

When operating the component selected by the input

selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.

When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO

area, set it to the TV position.

—

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly using

“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end

of this manual.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer

using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

The library code of the remote control and

the remote control ID of this unit do not

match.

Match the remote control ID of this unit with the

corresponding remote control library code.

91, 94

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

The remote control

does not learn new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions.

101

115

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ AUTO SETUP

Before AUTO SETUP

During AUTO SETUP

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.

—

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

E-1:NO FRONT SP

Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not

detected.

Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B.

—

Check the front L/R speaker connections. 15

E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 15

E-3:NO PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 15

E-4:SBR->SBL

Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT

SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you

only have one surround back speaker.

E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud.

Try running AUTO SETUP in a quiet environment.

—

Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners

or move them away from the optimizer microphone.

—

E-6:CHECK SUR.

Surround back speaker(s) is (are)

connected, though surround L/R speakers

are not.

Connect surround speakers when you use (a)

surround back speaker(s).

E-7:NO MIC

The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

E-8:NO SIGNAL

The optimizer microphone does not detect

test tones.

Check the microphone setting. 32

Check the speaker connections and placement. 15

E-9:USER CANCEL

The AUTO SETUP procedure was

cancelled due to user activity.

Run AUTO SETUP again. 32

E-10:INTERNAL

ERROR

An internal error occurred. Run AUTO SETUP again. 32

116

TROUBLESHOOTING

After AUTO SETUP

• If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again.

• If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.

• If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.

• If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.

■ HDMI

Warning message Cause Remedy

See

page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Speaker polarity is not correct. This

message may appear depending on the

speakers even when the speakers are

connected correctly.

Check the speaker connections for proper polarity

(+ or –).

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)

The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.

—

W-3:LEVEL ERROR

The difference of volume level among

speakers is excessive. (No level correction

is made.)

Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers

are set in locations with similar conditions.

—

Check the speaker connections. 15

Use speakers of similar quality.

—

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 33

Notes

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

DEVICE OVER

More than 5 HDMI components including

this unit are connected.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components.

—

HDCP ERROR HDCP testing failed.

Check that the connected HDMI components support

the HDCP copy protection standards.

—

GLOSSARY

117

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)

ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes

the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to

provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you

set up your home theater system using all eight speaker

outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround

Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and

Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close

together facing the front of the room will provide the

largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to

place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to

go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that

most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which

will re-optimized the surround sound-field.

ASA is used in three new modes: THX Select2 Cinema,

THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. It

provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels

(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.

An additional channel especially for bass effects, called

LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the

system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to

minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range

channels and the precise sound orientation generated

using digital sound processing provide listeners with a

previously unheard of excitement and realism.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using

a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital

EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with

Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,

you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving

sound especially with scenes that have flyover and fly-

around effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic x

Dolby Pro Logic x is a new technology enabling 6.1 or

7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-

channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a

Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. 96 refers to

a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate). 24 refers to 24-bit word length.

DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original

96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with

full-quality full-motion video for music programs and

motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,

left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus

an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-

channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that

enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround

back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.

■ ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering

studios.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

GLOSSARY

Audio information

118

GLOSSARY

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for

6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the full-

range channels with higher separation comparable to

digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;

Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode

for movies.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code

modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ THX Cinema processing

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies

established by the world-renowned film production

company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’

personal desire to make your experience of the film

soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home

theater, as faithful as possible to what the director

intended.

Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters

called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back

in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions.

This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto

Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for

playback in a small home theater environment.

THX engineers developed patented technologies to

accurately translate the sound from the movie theater

environment into the home, correcting the tonal and

spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX

indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in

Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).

Adaptive decorrelation

In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers

help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but

in a home theater there are usually only two speakers. This

can make the surround speakers sound like headphones

that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround

sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you

move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive

decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time

and phase relationship with respect to the other surround

channel. This expands the listening position and

creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious

surround experience as in a movie theater.

Re-equalization

The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively

bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment

in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be

played back in large movie theaters using very different

professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the

correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a

small home environment.

Timbre matching

The human ear changes our perception of sound

depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a

movie theater, there is an array of surround speakers so

that the surround information is all around you. In a home

theater, you use only two speakers located to the side of

your head. The timbre matching feature filters the

information going to the surround speakers so that they

more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound

coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless

panning between the front and surround speakers.

119

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the

B and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. A monitor with

component input jacks is required in order to use the

component signal for output.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;

color, luminance and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss

and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed

for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original

sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and

audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room

of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects without any surround speakers by using

virtual surround speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

Video information Sound field program information

120

GLOSSARY

This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the

Parametric EQ settings (see page 81), to optimize the

frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to

match your listening environment. YPAO uses a

combination of the following three parameters

(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise

adjustment of the frequency characteristics.

■ Frequency

This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave

increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz.

■ Gain

This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB

between –20 and +6 dB.

■ Q factor

The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as

the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the

values 0.5 and 10.

YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your

listening requirements using a combination of the above

three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each

equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit

has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.

The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise

adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).

This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as

in Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 2

Parametric equalizer information

Gain

Frequency

Original frequency

characteristic

Band 1

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Gain

Frequency

Band 1

Band 2

Frequency

characteristic after

correction

Original frequency

characteristic

SPECIFICATIONS

121

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 120 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 155/195/250/330 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[Asia, General, China and Korea models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ......................................................... 170 W

• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 170 W

• Dynamic Headroom

8 Ω ..................................................................................... 1.03 dB

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 125 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω .................................................. 140 or more

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more

• Output Level/Output Impedance

OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω

SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT

[U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models]

................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance

CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R ............................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to OUT (REC)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less

CD, etc. to Front L/R

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R

[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ..................... 81 dB or more

[Other models] ........................................................ 86 dB or more

CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more

CD, etc.

(5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................3.5 kHz

• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................450 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................1.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type (Gray Back)

[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC

[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .......................... NTSC/PAL

• Signal Level

Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)

Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)

• Maximum Input Level (V CONV. off) ................. 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (V CONV. off) ....................... 60 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Component (V CONV. off) ................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)

Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB

• Frequency Response

Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

SPECIFICATIONS

122

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General and Asia model]

....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA

[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less

[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less

[Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less

• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]

6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W

•AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[Australia and U.K. models] .... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)

[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 171 x 438 mm

(17.1 x 6.7 x 17.2 in)

• Weight .................................................................. 17.4 kg (38.4 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES

CABLE

ABC 0030, 0035

AMERICAST 0926

BELL SOUTH 0926

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

0303

BRITISH TELECOM 0030

CABLE & WIRELESS

1095

DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

DIRECTOR 0503

FILMNET 0470

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0030, 0303, 0503,

0837,

GOLDSTAR 0171

HAMLIN 0036, 0300

JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,

0837

LG 0171

MNET 0470

MEMOREX 0027

MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,

1133

NTL 1095

NOOS 0844

ONO 1095

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

0030

PACE 0264, 1087, 1095

PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134

PARAGON 0027

PHILIPS 0332, 0344

PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,

1904

PULSAR 0027

QUASAR 0027

REGAL 0300, 0306

RUNCO 0027

SAGEM 0844

SAMSUNG 0027, 0171

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

SONY 1033

STARCOM 0030

SUPERCABLE 0303

TS 0030

TELE+1 0470

TELEWEST 1095

TORX 0030

TOSHIBA 0027

TRANS PX 0303

UNITED CABLE 0030

ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926

CD PLAYER

AIWA 0184

ARCAM 0184

AUDIO RESEARCH 0184

AUDIO TON 0184

AUDIOLAB 0184

AUDIOMECA 0184

CAIRN 0184

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

0056

CARVER 0184, 0206

CYRUS 0184

DKK 0027

DMX ELECTRONICS

0184

DENON 0900

DYNAMIC BASS 0206

EMERSON 0332

FISHER 0206

GENEXXA 0059, 0332

GOODMANS 0332

GRUNDIG 0184

HARMAN/KARDON

0184, 0200

HITACHI 0059

JVC 0099

KENWOOD 0055, 0064

KRELL 0184

LXI 0332

LINN 0184

MCS 0056

MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332

MARANTZ 0056, 0184

MATSUI 0184

MEMOREX 0332

MERIDIAN 0184

MICROMEGA 0184

MIRO 0027

MISSION 0184

MYRYAD 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

NAIM 0184

OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,

0206, 0332

PANASONIC 0056

PHILIPS 0184

PIONEER 0059, 0332

POLK AUDIO 0184

PROTON 0184

QED 0184

QUAD 0184

QUASAR 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

REALISTIC 0206

REVOX 0184

ROTEL 0184

SAE 0184

SANSUI 0184, 0332

SANYO 0206

SCOTT 0332

SEARS 0332

SHARP 0064

SIMAUDIO 0184

SONIC FRONTIERS 0184

SONY 0027

SYMPHONIC 0332

TAG MCL ARE N 01 84

TANDY 0059

TECHNICS 0056

THORENS 0184

THULE 0184

UNIVERSUM 0184

VICTOR 0099

WARDS 0184

YAMAHA 2300, 2301

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0653

MARANTZ 0653

PHILIPS 0653

YAMAHA 2400

DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

0757

ALBA 0744

AMSTRAD 0740

APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,

0782, 0821, 0823,

0857, 1127

BLAUPINKT 0744

BLUE PARADE 0598

BUSH 0740

CENTREX 0699

CLATRONIC 0815

CYBERHOME 0741

DVD2000 0548

DAEWOO 0811, 0797

DANSAI 0797

DECCA 0797

DENON 0517

DIAMOND 0795

DIGITREX 0699

EMERSON 0618

ENTERPRISE 0618

FISHER 0697

GE 0549, 0744

GO VIDEO 0742

GOLDSTAR 0768

GRADIENTE 0678

GREENHILL 0744

GRUNDIG 0566

HITACHI 0600, 0691

HITEKER 0699

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

KENWOOD 0517, 0561

KOSS 0678

LG 0768

LIMIT 0795

MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702

MARANTZ 0566

MEMOREX 0858

MICO 0750

MICROSOFT 0549

MINTEK 0744

MITSUBISHI 0548

MUSTEK 0757

NESA 0744

ONKYO 0530

ORITRON 0678

PALSONIC 0699

PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389

PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,

0881

PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,

0659

POLK AUDIO 0566

PROSCAN 0549

QWESTAR 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

ROTEL 0650

SM ELECTRONIC 0757

SAMSUNG 0600

SANYO 0697

SHARP 0657

SHERWOOD 0797

SHINSONIC 0560

SLIM ART 0811

SONY 0560, 0891

SYLVANIA 0702

TATUNG 0797

TEAC 0598, 0744

TECHNICS 0517

THETA DIGITAL 0598

THOMSON 0549

TOSHIBA 0530

URBAN CONCEPTS 0530

XBOX 0549

YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,

2100, 2101, 2102

ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768

ZEUS 0811

DVD RECORDER

PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802

PHILIPS 2808

PIONEER 2804, 2805, 2806

SHARP 2812, 2813

SONY 2809, 2810, 2811

TOSHIBA 2803

VICTOR 2814

YAMAHA 2807

LD PLAYER

CARVER 0091

DENON 0086

MARANTZ 0091

MITSUBISHI 0086

NAD 0086

NAGSMI 0086

OPTIMUS 0086

PHILIPS 0091

PIONEER 0086

SALORA 0091

SONY 0228

TELEFUNKEN 0086

YAMAHA 2200

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0708

ONKYO 0895

SHARP 0888

SONY 0517

YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 0558

AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,

1432, 1668

ALCO 1417

ANAM 1636

APEX DIGITAL 1284

AUDIOLAB 1216

AUDIOTRONIC 1216

AUDIOVOX 1417

BOSE 1256

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

1397

CAPETRONIC 0558

CARVER 1116, 1216

CENTREX 1284

DENON 1387

FERGUSON 0558

FINE ARTS 1216

GRUNDIG 1216

HARMAN/KARDON

0137, 1331

INTEGRA 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,

1522

KLH 1417, 1439

KENWOOD 1054, 1340

MCS 0066

MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,

1296,

MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,

1316

MICROMEGA 1216

MUSICMAGIC 1116

MYRYAD 1216

NAD 0347

NORCENT 1416

ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325

OPTIMUS 0558, 1050

PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,

1790

PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,

1295, 1296, 1310,

1316

PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,

1411

POLK AUDIO 1316

PROSCAN 1281

QUASAR 0066

RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,

1417, 1636,

SABA 0558

SANSUI 1116

SCHNEIDER 0558

SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,

1685, 1785

STEREOPHONICS 1050

SUNFIRE 1340

TEAC 1417

TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,

1545

TELEFUNKEN 0558

THOMSON 1281

THORENS 1216

UHER 0558

VENTURER 1417

VICTOR 0101

WARDS 0041, 0185

YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,

2600, 2601, 2602,

2603, 2604, 2605

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 1327

ABSAT 0150

ALBA 0482

ALPHASTAR 0799

AMSTRAD 0874

ASTON 0169, 1156

ASTRO 0200

ATSAT 1327

AVALON 0423

BLAUPUNKT 0200

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

0874, 1202

CANAL DIGITAL 0880

CANAL SATELLITE 0880

CANAL+ 0880

CHAPARRAL 0243

CITYCOM 1203

CONNEXIONS 0423

CROSSDIGITAL 1136

CYRUS 0227

D-BOX 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

DAERYUNG 0423

DAEWOO 1323

DIGENIUS 0326

DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,

0666, 0751, 0776,

0846, 1103, 1136,

1169, 1776, 1883

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

0802, 1032

DISHPRO 0802, 1032

DISTRATEL 0111

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

1264

ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,

0802, 0880, 0898,

1032, 1113

ENGEL 1044

EXPRESSVU 0802

FTE 0890

FINLUX 0482

FRACARRO 0898

FUBA 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

GALAXIS 0890, 1138

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0896

GOLD BOX 0880

GRUNDIG 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423

HITACHI 0482, 0846

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

0776, 1169, 1776

HUMAX 0890, 1203

INVIDEO 0898

JVC 0802

KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,

0276, 0685, 1248

KREISELMEYER 0200

LABGEAR 1323

LOGIX 1044

LORENZEN 0326

MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751

MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,

1110

MARANTZ 0227

MEDIASAT 0880

MEMOREX 0751

METRONIC 0111

MITSUBISHI 0776

MOTOROLA 0896

MYRYAD 0227

NEXT LEVEL 0896

NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,

1154, 1250, 1750

OCTALTV 1032

ORBITECH 1127

PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,

1350

PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,

1347

PANDA 0482

PAYSAT 0751

PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,

0749, 0751, 0776,

0880, 1103, 1169,

1776

PIONEER 0880

PROMAX 0482

PROSCAN 0419, 0593

RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,

0882

RFT 0227

RADIOSHACK 0896

RADIOLA 0227

RADIX 0423

SKY 0874, 0883, 1202

SM ELECTRONIC 1227

SABRE 0482

SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280

SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,

1319

SAT CONTROL 1327

SATSTATION 1110

SCHWAIGER 1138

SEEMANN 0423

SIEMENS 0200

SONY 0666, 0874, 1666

STAR CHOICE 0896

STRONG 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

TANTEC 0482

TECHNISAT 1126, 1127

TELESTAR 1127

THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,

1318

TOPFIELD 1233

TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776

ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666

UNIDEN 0749, 0751

UNIVERSUM 0200

VENTANA 0227

WISI 0200, 0423, 0482

XSAT 0150

ZEHNDER 1102

ZENITH 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0056

CARVER 0056

GRUNDIG 0056

HARMAN/KARDON

0056

MAGNAVOX 0056

MARANTZ 0056

MYRYAD 0056

OPTIMUS 0054

PHILIPS 0056

PIONEER 0054

POLK AUDIO 0056

RCA 0054

REVOX 0056

SANSUI 0056

SONY 0270

THORENS 0056

WARDS 0054

YAMAHA 2700,2701

AGB 0543

AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,

0119, 0120, 0135,

0205, 0207, 0478

ASA 0131

AWA 00 36

ACURA 0036

ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680

ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490

ADVENT 0788

AIKO 0119

AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,

0388, 0543, 0729,

0839

AKURA 0291

ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,

0695

AMERICA ACTION 0207

AMPRO 0778

AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,

0398, 0439, 0460,

0543

ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277

ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677

ANITECH 0036

APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,

0794

AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136

BANG & OLUFSEN 0592

BASIC 0036

BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539

BAYSONIC 0207

BEAUMARK 0205

BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,

0742

BELL & HOWELL 0181

BEON 0064

BLAUPUNKT 0222

BLUE SKY 0695, 1064

BONDSTEC 0274

BRADFORD 0207

BRANDT 0136, 0362

BROKSONIC 0263, 0490

BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,

0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

CANDLE 0057

CARNIVALE 0057

CARVER 0081, 0197

CASCADE 0036

CATHAY 0064

CELEBRITY 0027

CELERA 0792

CENTURION 0064

CHANGHONG 0792

CHING TAI 0036, 0119

CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,

0207

CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207

CIMLINE 0036

CINERAL 0119, 0478

CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119

CLARION 0207

CLARIVOX 0064

CLATRONIC 0274, 0397

CONDOR 0347, 0397

CONRAC 0835

iii

CONTEC 0036, 0207

CRAIG 0207

CROSLEY 0081

CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,

0397, 0445

CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,

0081, 0087, 0120,

0172, 0181, 0193,

0478, 0729, 1174,

1374

DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0181,

0197, 0205, 0207,

0401, 0478, 0650,

0661, 1688

DANSAI 0064

DAYTON 0036

DE GRAAF 0235, 0575

DECCA 0064, 0543

DENON 0172

DIGATRON 0064

DIXI 0036, 0064

DUMONT 0044

DWIN 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

ELBE 0286

ELECTROBAND 0027

ELIN 0064, 0575

ELITE 0347

ELTA 0036

EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,

0263, 0388, 0490,

0650

ENVISION 0057,0840

EPSON 0860

ERRES 0064

ETHER 0036, 0057

ETRON 0036

EUROPHON 0543

FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,

0265, 0314, 0362,

0587

FIDELITY 0388

FINLANDIA 0235, 0373

FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,

0373, 0543

FIRSTAR 0036, 0263

FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695

FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,

0397

FLINT 0482

FORMENTI 0064, 0347

FORTRESS 0120

FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291

FUJITSU 0710, 0836

FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291

FUTURETECH 0207

GE 0057, 0074, 0078,

0119, 0205, 0207,

0478, 0587, 1174,

1374, 1481

GEC 0064, 0543

GATEWAY 1782, 1783

GELOSO 0036

GENEXXA 0190

GIBRALTER 0044, 0057

GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,

0181, 0205, 0404

GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,

0661

GOREMJE 0397

GRADIENTE 0080, 0197

GRAETZ 0190, 0388

GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,

0543

GRANDIN 0637

GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,

0583, 0614

GRUNPY 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

HALLMARK 0205

HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207

HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,

0455, 0583

HANTAREX 0543

HARMAN/KARDON 0081

HARVARD 0207

HAVERMY 0120

HELLO KITTY 0478

HINARI 0036, 0064

HISAWA 0482

HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,

0132, 0136, 0172,

0190, 0205, 0252,

0383, 0508, 0575,

0605, 1172, 1283

HUA TUN 0036

HUANYU 0401

HYPSON 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445

INDIANA 0064

INFINITY 0081

INGELEN 0190

INNO HIT 0543

INNOVA 0064

INTEQ 0044

INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,

0388, 0539

INTERVISION 0064, 0291,

0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,

0680, 0710

JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,

0183, 0263

JENSEN 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0057, 0207

KAISUI 0036

KAPSCH 0190

KARCHER 0637

KATHREIN 0583

KENDO 0064

KENWOOD 0057

KNEISSEL 0286, 0462

KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207

KORPEL 0064

KOYODA 0036

L&S ELECTRONIC 0835

LG 0057, 0064, 0087,

0135, 0205, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0205

LEYCO 0064, 0291

LIESENK & TTER 0064

LOEWE 0539

LUXOR 0383, 0388

M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,

0131, 0132, 0136,

0190, 0314, 0373,

0401, 0507

MGA 0057, 0177, 0205

MTC 0057, 0087, 0539

MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543

MAGNAFON 0543

MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,

1481

MANESTH 0291, 0347

MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,

0583

MARK 0064

MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,

0398, 0514, 0543

MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677

MEDIATOR 0064

MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064

MEGATRON 0172, 0205

MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,

0205, 0277, 0490,

1064

METZ 0474

MICROMAXX 0835

MICROSTAR 0835

MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078

MINERVA 0514

MINOKA 0439

MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,

0177, 0181, 0205,

0207, 0263, 0277,

0539, 0863, 1277

MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,

0636

MOTOROLA 0120

MULTITECH 0036, 0207

MYRYAD 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,

0893

NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,

0181, 0183, 0197,

0205, 0482, 0524,

1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

NECKERMANN 0064, 0583

NETSAT 0064

NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,

0205

NIKKAI 0064, 0291

NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205

NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,

0575, 0658

NORCENT 0775, 0851

NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,

0587

OCEANIC 0190, 0388

ONWA 0207, 0460

OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,

0677

OPTONICA 0120

ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,

0490, 0543

OSAKI 0291, 0439

OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,

0539, 0583

PALLADIUM 0397, 0445

PANAMA 0291

PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,

0190, 0277, 0677,

1437

PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347

PAUSA 0036

PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,

0087, 0183, 0205,

1374

PERDIO 0347

PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,

0172, 0205, 0207,

0274, 0490, 1688

PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,

0078, 0081, 0119,

0135, 0205, 0401,

0583, 0717, 1481

PHONOLA 0064

PILOT 0057

PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,

0314, 0706, 0787,

0893

PORTLAND 0119

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0543

PRIMA 0788

PRISM 0078

PROFEX 0036, 0388

PROSCAN 0074

PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,

0291, 0445, 0695

PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205

PULSAR 0044

QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677

QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

R-LINE 0064

RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,

0117, 0119, 0205,

0706, 1074, 1174,

1274, 1374, 1474,

1481, 1574

RFT 0455

RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,

0181, 0205, 0207

RADIOLA 0064

RADIOMARELLI 0543

REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,

0207

REDIFFUSION 0388

REOC 0741

REVOX 0064

REX 0190, 0286, 0291

ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445

RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,

0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,

0362

SACCS 0265

SAGEM 0637

SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543

SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,

0575

SAMBERS 0543

SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,

0120, 0181, 0198,

0205, 0677, 1782

SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,

0087, 0117, 0119,

0181, 0205, 0291,

0397, 0583, 0614,

0645, 0729, 0793,

0839, 0841

SANSEI 0478

SANSUI 0490

SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,

0235, 0366, 0826

SCHAUB LORENZ 0388

SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,

0695

SCOTCH 0205

SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263

SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0198, 0205

SELECO 0190, 0286

SEMIVOX 0207

SEMP 0183

SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677

SHEN YING 0036, 0119

SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263

SIAREM 0543

SIEMENS 0064, 0222

SINUDYNE 0543

SKANTIC 0383

SKYGIANT 0207

SKYWORTH 0064

SOLAVOX 0190

SONITRON 0235

SONOKO 0036, 0064

SONOLOR 0190, 0235

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,

1127, 1532, 1678

SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207

SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445

SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,

0183, 0205

SQUAREVIEW 0198

STANDARD 0036

STARLITE 0207

STERN 0190, 0286

SUPREME 0027

SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198

SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207

SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0478

SYSLINE 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCI 0044

TVS 0490

TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205

TAI YI 0036

TANDY 0120, 0190

TASHIKO 0119, 0677

TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,

0081, 0087, 0181,

0183, 0543

TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,

0439, 0445, 0482,

0695, 1064

TEC 0274

TECHNEMA 0347

TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677

TECHWOOD 0078

TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0291,

0680

TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,

0177, 0207

TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,

0362, 0652, 0729

TELEMEISTER 0347

TELETECH 0036

TENSAI 0347

TERA 0057

THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,

0652, 1474

THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,

0535, 0645, 0677,

0859, 1283, 1383,

1683, 1731

TRIUMPH 0543

TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119

UHER 0347

UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,

0291, 0373, 0397,

0519

VECTOR RESEARCH

0057

VESTEL 0064

VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,

0680

VIDEOSAT 0274

VIDIKRON 0081

VIDTECH 0205

VIEWSONIC 1782

VISION 0347

VOXSON 0190

WALTHAM 0383

WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,

0893

WATSON 0064, 0347

WAYCON 0183

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0064, 0347, 0490,

0650

YAMAHA 0057, 0677, 0796,

0860,

2900 (projector),

2901 (projector),

2902, 2903

YAPSHE 0277

YOKO 0064, 0291

ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,

0490

VCR

ASA 0064, 0108

ADMIRAL 0075

ADVENTURA 0027

AIKO 0305

AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,

0375, 0379

AKAI 0068, 0342

AKIBA 0099

ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,

0379

AMERICA ACTION 0305

AMERICAN HIGH 0062

AMSTRAD 0027

ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,

0305, 0507

ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589

ANITECH 0099

ASHA 0267

ASUKA 0064

AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305

BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131

BASIC LINE 0099, 0305

BEAUMARK 0267

BELL & HOWELL 0131

BLAUPUNKT 0253

BRANDT 0347

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

0068

BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506

BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

CALIX 0064

CANON 0062

CARVER 0108

CIMLINE 0099

CINERAL 0305

CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305

COLT 0099

COMBITECH 0379

CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,

0267

CROWN 0099, 0305

CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,

0087, 1062

CYBERNEX 0267

CYRUS 0108

DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,

0669, 1305

DANSAI 0099

DE GRAAF 0069

DECCA 0027, 0108

DENON 0069

DUAL 0068

DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131

DYNATECH 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

ELCATECH 0099

ELECTROHOME 0064

ELECTROPHONIC 0064

EMEREX 0059

EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,

0070, 0072, 0211,

0267, 0305, 1305,

1506

FERGUSON 0068, 0347

FIDELITY 0027

FINLANDIA 0108, 0131

FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,

0131

FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,

0099

FISHER 0074, 0131

FUJI 0060, 0062

FUJITSU 0027, 0072

FUNAI 0027

GE 0062, 0087, 0267,

0834, 1062, 1087

GEC 0108

GARRARD 0027

GENERAL 0072

GO VIDEO 0459

GOLDHAND 0099

GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,

1264

GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,

0305

GRADIENTE 0027

GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267

GRANADA 0108, 0131

GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099

GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,

0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

HANSEATIC 0064

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0027

HARMAN/KARDON 0108

HARWOOD 0099

HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379

HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,

0069, 0267

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0069

HYPSON 0099

ITT 0068, 0131, 0267

ITV 0064, 0305

IMPERIAL 0027

INTERFUNK 0108

JVC 0068, 0072, 0094

JENSEN 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

KAISUI 0099

KENWOOD 0068, 0094

KODAK 0062, 0064

KOLIN 0068, 0070

KORPEL 0099

LG 0064, 0069, 0072,

0507

LXI 0064

LENCO 0305

LEYCO 0099

LLOYD’S 0027

LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589

LOGIK 0099, 0267

LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131

M ELECTRONIC 0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0070, 0267

MGN TECHNOLOGY

0267

MTC 0027, 0267

MAGNASONIC 1305

MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,

0108, 1808

MAGNIN 0267

MANESTH 0072, 0099

MARANTZ 0062, 0108

MARTA 0064

MATSUI 0375, 0379

MATSUSHITA 0062

MEDION 0375

MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,

0066, 0074, 0075,

0131, 0267, 0334,

0375, 1264

MEMPHIS 0099

METZ 0064, 0374, 1589

MINOLTA 0069

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMI SH I 009 9

YO KA N 0 09 9

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V1600

Printed in Malaysia WF99900

RX-V1600

AV R e c e i ve r

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V1600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 26, 2005 4:34 PM

Transcripción de documentos

RX-V1600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 26, 2005 4:34 PM U RX-V1600 RX-V1600 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WF99900 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. iii CONTENTS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 4 Handling the remote control ...................................... 5 Opening and closing the front panel door.................. 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 6 PREPARATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 14 Introduction.............................................................. 32 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 32 Using AUTO SETUP .............................................. 33 BASIC OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 36 Additional operations............................................... 38 RECORDING ....................................................... 45 FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 46 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ............... 52 What is XM Satellite Radio? ................................... 52 XM Satellite Radio connections .............................. 52 XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 53 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 54 Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode................... 55 Using XM Satellite Radio search modes ................. 56 Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 59 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information .......................................................... 60 For movie/video sources.......................................... 64 For music sources .................................................... 66 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................67 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS......................................71 ADVANCED OPERATION MANUAL SETUP.................................................75 Using MANUAL SETUP ........................................ 77 Using BASIC MENU .............................................. 78 Using SOUND MENU ............................................ 81 Using INPUT MENU .............................................. 83 Using OPTION MENU ........................................... 85 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................89 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 89 Adjusting speaker levels .......................................... 89 ADVANCED SETUP ............................................90 Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................... 90 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................92 Control area ............................................................. 92 Controlling each component.................................... 93 Setting remote control codes ................................... 94 Using LEARN ......................................................... 96 Using RE-NAME .................................................... 98 Using MACRO ........................................................ 99 Using CLEAR........................................................ 101 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 .................................................104 Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ........................................... 104 Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3.................................... 105 Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3.............................. 106 Using the control mode of Zone 2 and Zone 3............................................. 107 HDMI ...................................................................108 What is HDMI? ..................................................... 108 Setting the HDMI parameters................................ 109 Basic HDMI operations ......................................... 109 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46 Manual tuning.......................................................... 47 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 47 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49 Selecting preset stations........................................... 50 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................64 ADVANCED OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 36 What is a sound field? ............................................. 62 Changing parameter settings ................................... 62 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS AUTO SETUP....................................................... 32 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......62 BASIC OPERATION Before connecting speakers ..................................... 14 Connecting speakers ................................................ 15 Using bi-wire and bi-AMP connections .................. 19 Information on cables and jacks used for connections ............................................ 20 Connecting HDMI components............................... 23 Connecting video components................................. 24 Connecting audio components................................. 27 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 29 Connecting the power cable..................................... 30 Turning on and off this unit ..................................... 30 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 31 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 6 Remote control........................................................... 8 Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................. 10 Front panel display .................................................. 11 Rear panel ................................................................ 13 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................110 GLOSSARY.........................................................117 Audio information ................................................. 117 Video information.................................................. 119 Sound field program information .......................... 119 Parametric equalizer information .......................... 120 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................121 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 120 W + 120 W Center: 120 W Surround: 120 W + 120 W Surround Back: 120 W + 120 W HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio ◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ THX Select2 ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24 ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic x decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Other features ◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ Short message function ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ S-video input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Analog video I/P conversion from 480i to 480p ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening mode ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and learning/macro capability ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. 2 “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. © 2005 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control POWER POWER POWER STANDBY TV AV A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control POWER XM SELECT TUNER CD CD-R 2 3 1 DTV AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT TV SET MENU MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT 4 5 6 ENT DVR/VCR2 DVD V-AUX 7 8 9 0 + + PRESET VOLUME NIGHT Batteries (x6) (AAA, R03) – – A/B/C/D/E MUTE AUDIO ENTER PHONO VCR1 MUTE PRESET/CH TITLE STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE A-E/CAT. ON SCREEN A-E/CAT. k STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. k k RETURN XM MEMORY k PRESET 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 0 7 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ID1 ID2 9 DISPLAY PRESET/CH ALL NUMBER 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Power cable Speaker terminal wrench AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna Optimizer microphone 3 GETTING STARTED Installing batteries in the remote controls Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash, or its light or display window become dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. ■ Installing batteries ■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert two supplied batteries (AAA, R03) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. GETTING STARTED Handling the remote control INTRODUCTION The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A MASTER ON EFFECT INPUT SPEAKERS ON/OFF YPAO OPTIMIZER MIC B SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 30 30 SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A STANDBY XM POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 CD-R DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT TV MUTE PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE PURE DIRECT MENU SRCH MODE BAND NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. ON SCREEN RETURN STRAIGHT DISPLAY XM MEMORY STEREO 1 EFFECT MUSIC ENTERTAIN 2 THX MOVIE 3 STANDARD 5 4 SELECT 6 EXTD SUR. 7 8 A SPEAKERS B 9 0 +10 ENT. REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperatures – dusty places Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel Note The XM Satellite Radio controls (SEARCH MODE, CATEGORY, PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, MEMORY and DISPLAY) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when XM is selected as the input source. For details, see “Front panel functions” on page 53. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E F PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A ON/OFF MASTER ON EFFECT INPUT YPAO B SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF (U.S.A. model) G H I 1 MASTER ON/OFF Press inward to the ON position. • Turns on this unit. • Turns on the main room. • Sets Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. Press again to release it outward to the OFF position. • Turns off this unit. • Turns off the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3. See page 30 for details. 2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF Turns on this unit only or sets it to the standby mode. y In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small quantity of power. Notes • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 6 to 7 second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 3 INPUT selector Selects the desired input source. 6 J KL M 4 AUDIO SELECT Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when one component is connected to two or more input jacks on the rear panel (see page 43). 5 MULTI CH INPUT Selects the input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the input source selected with the INPUT selector (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 6 A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when TUNER is selected as the input source (see page 50). 7 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h Selects the preset station number (1 to 8) when TUNER is selected as the input source and the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when TUNER is selected as the input source and the colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display. See pages 46 to 51 for details. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 8 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 0 FM/AM Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when TUNER is selected as the input source (see page 46). Note The frequency of the previously received station is automatically recalled. A MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory when TUNER is selected as the input source. Hold down for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 47). B TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L), DISPLAY Switches the tuning mode between automatic (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual (the AUTO indicator is turned off) when TUNER is selected as the input source. C STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs on or off. When STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input signals are output directly from the respective speakers without effect processing. D Remote control sensor Receives infrared signals from the remote control. E TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front left and right and center channels (see page 38). F PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 41). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to 2channel stereo (front left and right channels). J VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from an external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals at these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. K MULTI ZONE buttons ZONE 2 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode. See page 30 for details. Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. ZONE 3 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode. See page 30 for details. Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. ZONE CONTROL Switches the zone you want to control between the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 106). After you press ZONE CONTROL, the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation. Note L PROGRAM selector Use to select sound field programs or adjust the balance of bass and treble in conjunction with TONE CONTROL. The indicator around the button lights up when the unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode. M VOLUME Controls the volume level of all audio channels. G OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect the supplied optimizer microphone to run AUTO SETUP (see page 32). This does not affect the OUT (REC) level. Note H SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. 7 INTRODUCTION 9 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when TUNER is selected as the input source (see pages 46 to 51). I PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. Set AMP/ SOURCE/TV to AMP to operate this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 92. Note The XM Satellite Radio controls (XM, XM MEMORY, SRCH MODE, DISPLAY, cursor buttons k / n / l / h, numeric buttons and ENT.) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when XM is selected as the input source. For details, see “Remote control functions” on page 53. 1 2 3 A POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE 5 LEVEL TV INPUT MENU BAND SRCH MODE NIGHT 6 AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. 7 ON SCREEN RETURN STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT XM MEMORY 8 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON G H J K L M N MOVIE A SPEAKERS B +10 MODE F I PURE DIRECT SET MENU TITLE E TV MUTE PRESET/CH B C D ENT. O PTY SEEK START 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 Transmission indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select TUNER as the input source. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM to select XM as the input source. 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected input source that you can control. 5 LEVEL, BAND Selects the speaker you want to adjust the speaker output level for when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP (see pages 89). Switches the reception band between FM and AM when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is selected as the input source. 6 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER Selects and adjusts the DSP program parameters or OSD menu items when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. Press l / h to select a preset station group (A to E) and k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is selected as the input source. 7 RETURN Returns to the upper or the previous directory in the OSD menu. 8 Sound field program / numeric buttons Select sound field programs when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in the multichannel format (see page 40). Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback of multi-channel software (see page 39). Use numbers 1 to 8 to select preset stations when AMP/ SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and TUNER is selected as the input source. 9 MACRO ON/OFF Turns on or off the macro function (see page 100). REC DISC SKIP 9 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR 0 (U.S.A. model) 8 RE–NAME P Q R 0 MACRO Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a single button (see page 99). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS A STANDBY Sets this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode (see page 30). J PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode (see page 41). This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. L NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 41). B POWER Turns on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 30). M ON SCREEN Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD) that appears on your monitor (see page 89). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. C AUDIO SEL Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack between AUTO, HDMI, COAX/OPT and ANALOG when one component is connected to two or more input jacks on the rear panel (see page 43). D SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. E MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder, etc. F SELECT k / n Selects another input source that you can control independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons. G VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. N STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound field programs off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, 2-channel or multi-channel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. O SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. P RE-NAME Changes the name of the input source in the display window (see page 98). Q CLEAR Clears remote control codes or functions acquired from the learn, macro and rename features (see page 101). R LEARN Programs remote control codes or functions from other remote controls (see page 96). H AMP/SOURCE/TV Selects the component you want to control with the remote control. AMP Set to this position to operate this unit. SOURCE Set to this position to operate the component selected with an input selector button. TV Set to this position to operate the television assigned to either DTV or PHONO. Note If televisions are assigned to both DTV and PHONO, the one assigned to DTV takes priority and gets operated when AMP/ SOURCE/TV is set to TV. y To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 94. I MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. 9 INTRODUCTION Note K SET MENU Enters or exits the SET MENU mode. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control This section describes the function of each control on the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control Zone 2 or Zone 3. 1 Input selector buttons Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 and change the control area. Note 2 PRESET +/– Selects the preset station number (1 to 8) when TUNER is selected as the input source or Zone 2 or Zone 3. The XM Satellite Radio controls (XM, DISPLAY, PRESET, ALL, CAT., numeric buttons, NUMBER, cursor buttons k / n / l / h and ENT) are only applicable to the U.S.A. model and are operational only when XM is selected as the input source. For details, see “Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control functions” on page 54. POWER XM 5 1 2 3 TUNER CD CD-R 1 2 3 DTV STANDBY 6 CBL/SAT MD/TAPE 5 6 ENT VCR1 DVR/VCR2 DVD V-AUX 7 8 9 0 + + PRESET VOLUME – – This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 8 MUTE k k A-E/CAT. DISPLAY PRESET CAT. PRESET/CH k ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ID1 ID2 4 5 POWER Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3. Note 7 A/B/C/D/E ALL 4 ID1/ID2 switch Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2 (see page 95). PHONO 4 k 3 A/B/C/D/E Selects the preset station group (A to E) when TUNER is selected as the input source or Zone 2 or Zone 3. NUMBER 9 6 STANDBY Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode. Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 7 VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level or Zone 2 or Zone 3. 8 MUTE Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. (U.S.A. model) 10 9 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that of Zone 3. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 2 3 4 V-AUX YPAO HiFi DSP SP AB SILENT CINEMA VIRTUAL 5 DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD 6 MD/TAPE CD-R B CD E FG DSD PCM HI 1 YPAO indicator Lights up when the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress and when the AUTO SETUP speaker settings are used without any modifications. 2 HDMI indicator Lights up when HDMI components are assigned to HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks and they are recognized by this unit (see page 83). Turns off when no HDMI component is assigned to the either HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack or when no HDMI component is recognized by this unit although they are assigned to the HDMI IN jacks (see page 83). See page 108 for details. 3 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 4 Decoder indicators When any of the decoders of this unit operate, the respective indicator lights up. 5 Input source indicators Light up when the corresponding input source is selected. 6 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. 7 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. 8 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 9 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 0 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. PHONO 890A TUNER XM STEREO TUNED AUTO MEMORY dB VOLUME MUTE ZONE2 ZONE3 96/24 NIGHT L C R SLEEP LFE SL SB SR DIGITAL PL x CS EX DISCRETE 96 MATRIX 24 CD 7 J KL M NO P A MEMORY indicator Flashes to indicate that a station can be stored. B Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. C SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 38). D SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of front speakers are selected or when bi-wiring. E VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 43). F Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field Surround/surround back DSP sound field G HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. H PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. I DSD indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (direct stream digital) digital audio signals. J Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 11 INTRODUCTION Note The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. model. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS K 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. L LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal. M Input channel and speaker indicators Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. L C R SL SB SR Presence and surround back speaker indicators Light up according to the number of presence and surround back speakers set for PRESENCE SP (see page 79) and SB L/R SP (see page 79) in MANUAL SETUP when TEST TONE in MANUAL SETUP is set to ON (see page 81). y You can make settings for the presence and surround back speakers automatically by running AUTO SETUP (see page 32) or manually by adjusting settings for PRESENCE SP (see page 79) and SB L/R SP (see page 79) in MANUAL SETUP. N NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode. O SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on. 12 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 3 DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR COAXIAL 4 VIDEO S VIDEO R VIDEO AUDIO L R AUDIO 5 1 DVD DVR/ VCR 2 MD/TAPE OPTICAL CD 2 REMOTE WRENCH HOLDER DTV DTV R IN + AM ANT GND AC IN – OUT SPEAKERS A – + B – + L IN CBL/ SAT DVD OUT CD-R FRONT + – IN RS-232C IN 1 9 (REC) (PLAY) CBL/ SAT DTV 8 TUNER FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. +12V 15mA MAX. IN DVD CD 7 CONTROL OUT L (PLAY) DVD 6 INTRODUCTION 1 CENTER – + OUT (REC) VCR 1 MONITOR OUT CBL/SAT OUT MD/TAPE IN GND CD PHONO FRONT SPEAKER IMPEDANCE PRE OUT R IN 2 DVR/VCR 2 + SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) – – + 100W MAX.TOTAL SWITCHED L L R SURROUND SURROUND SUBWOOFER AC OUTLETS L R FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) OUT CD-R L R ZONE 2 OUT + CENTER R + – – + L DIGITAL OUTPUT MONITOR OUT XM – SINGLE (SB) ZONE 3 HDMI R SUBWOOFER OUTPUT CENTER L SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE SINGLE SURROUND BACK PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) G H MULTI CH INPUT (U.S.A. model) 0 A B C D E F 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See pages 24, 25 and 27 for connection information. 0 XM jack (U.S.A. model only) See page 52 for connection information. 2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 24, 25 and 27 for details. A HDMI IN/OUT connectors See page 108 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 24 and 25 for connection information. B RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult you dealer for details. 4 Audio component jacks See pages 24, 25 and 27 for connection information. 5 CONTROL OUT jacks These are control expansion terminals for factory use only. 6 WRENCH HOLDER Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when not in use (see page 16). C ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks See page 104 for details. D MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 26 for connection information. E PRE OUT jacks See page 28 for connection information. 7 Antenna terminals See page 29 for connection information. F REMOTE IN/OUT jacks See page 104 for details. 8 AC OUTLETS Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 30). G Speaker terminals See page 15 for connection information. 9 AC IN Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 30). H PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals See page 17 for connection information. 13 CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting speakers The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R* speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel audio sources and THX. * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). PL PR C FR FL 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR More than 30 cm (12 in) 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) Surround speakers (SR and SL) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. Subwoofer The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Presence speakers (PR and PL) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 64). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m (1 – 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Note Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 14 Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the PRIORITY parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 79). CONNECTIONS ■ Di-pole speaker layout Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please place the surround and surround back speakers according to the speaker layout below. FL C FR Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION SR SBL SBR : Di-pole speaker : Direction of the di-pole speaker phase Note A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. ■ Connecting to the speaker terminals FRONT terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the FRONT A or B terminals. Note The Canada model cannot output to two pairs of speaker systems simultaneously. CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker to these terminals. SURROUND ZONE 2(3) terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. 15 PREPARATION SL • If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 31). If you will use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial setting for speaker impedance. • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is disconnected from the power source. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. CONNECTIONS 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench 10 mm (3/8 in) 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 6 3 Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 4 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 16 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this unit when not in use. CONNECTIONS PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. ■ Speaker layout Refer to the following illustration as to where to place each speaker in your listening room. Note 9 You can also use these terminals to connect the Zone 2 speakers (see page 105). 1 10 2 4 Open the tab. 1 7 3 8 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. 1 Subwoofer 2 Front right speaker 3 Front left speaker 4 Center speaker 5 Surround back right speaker 6 Surround back left speaker 7 Surround right speaker 8 Surround left speaker 9 Presence right speaker PREPARATION 2 5 6 10 Presence left speaker ■ Connecting the banana plug (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 17 CONNECTIONS Front speakers (A) Right Left Subwoofer with built-in amplifier Center speaker 1 2 3 Front speakers (B) 4 (U.S.A. model) R + FRONT FRONT – + – + – SPEAKERS A – + B – + – + L CENTER – SPEAKER IMPEDANCE PRE OUT R L L R L R SUBWOOFER + CENTER R + – – + L – SINGLE (SB) SINGLE L R Right Left Surround speakers PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE 8 L R SURROUND 7 + 5 6 Right Left Surround back speakers 9 10 Right Left Presence speakers • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the PRIORITY parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 79). • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and operate only when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, Dolby Pro Logic x, THX Select2, THX Music, THX Games or THX Surround EX decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 18 CONNECTIONS Using bi-wire and bi-AMP connections ■ Conventional connection If you want to connect your speakers as traditional loudspeakers using the conventional connection method, connect your speakers using the regular left and right speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of terminals. + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R Shorting bars or bridges L Shorting bars or bridges This unit + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R L This unit ■ Bi-AMP connection The bi-AMP connection uses two amplifiers for both speakers. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff. Notes • Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. • To activate the bi-AMP connections, set BI-AMP to ON in ADVANCED SETUP (see page 91). • To make the bi-AMP connections, use the FRONT and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. ■ Bi-wire connection The bi-wire connection separates the woofer from the combined midrange and tweeter section. A bi-wire compatible speaker has four binding post terminals. These two sets of terminals allow the speaker to be split into two independent sections. This split connects the mid and high frequency drivers to one set of terminals and the low frequency driver to the other pair. Notes R – + – A – + L – + L FRONT R • Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. • To use the bi-wire connections, press SPEAKERS A on the front panel so that SP A lights up in the front panel display. + SINGLE SURROUND BACK This unit 19 PREPARATION Some of the speakers commercially available these days have speaker wire connections that allow bi-wiring or biamplification to enhance the performance of the speaker system. This unit allows you to make bi-wire and bi-AMP connections to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-wiring or bi-amplification. As these speakers are shipped to you, you will note gold-plated shorting bars or bridges, one connecting the two red input terminals and the other connecting the two black input terminals. Remove these shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to bi-wire or bi-AMP your speakers. CONNECTIONS Information on cables and jacks used for connections CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power until all connections between components are complete. ■ Cable indications For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables coaxial cables O C For video signals video cables S-video cables For HDMI signals 20 V S ■ Analog jacks You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the analog jacks are only output at the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. CONNECTIONS ■ Audio jacks This unit has four types of audio jacks (analog audio, digital audio coaxial, digital audio optical and HDMI). Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. AUDIO L R DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals. HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via digital optical cables. PREPARATION DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via digital coaxial cables. DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) HDMI jacks For HDMI digital audio signals. ■ Audio signal flow for OUT (REC) Input Output OUT (REC) HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) Digital audio DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) AUDIO Analog audio Through Digital output Analog output Notes • The audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks only and are not output at the analog OUT (REC) jacks. • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when HDMI SET is set to OTHER (see page 82). • 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals except multi-channel PCM signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack can be output at the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks. • Copy-protected 2-channel PCM signals with over 48 kHz/16 bit input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are not output at the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks. 21 CONNECTIONS ■ Video jacks This unit has four types of video jacks (composite, component, S-video and HDMI). Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 85), the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks interchangeably. In addition, when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 85) and HDMI I/P is set to ON (see page 86), the analog video signals input at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be digitally upconverted and output at the HDMI OUT jack. VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. HDMI jacks For HDMI digital video signals. ■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Input HDMI Output (MONITOR OUT) Digital video COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO Analog video VIDEO Through Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 85) HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 86) Notes • The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i to 480p. Set CMPNT I/P to ON in MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 85). • The analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and output at the S VIDEO or VIDEO jacks cannot be converted to 480p/1080i/720p. • When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows where the analog video signals input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks have the top priority. 1. COMPONENT VIDEO 2. S VIDEO 3. VIDEO • Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 85) and HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 86) are available only when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 85). 22 CONNECTIONS Connecting HDMI components This unit has the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks for digital audio and video signal input as well as the HDMI OUT jack for digital audio and video signal output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI OUT jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a projector). The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack you selected using the HDMI IN menu in I/O ASSIGNMENT (see page 83) or the INPUT selector on the front panel are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. In addition, the audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output to speakers, headphones and the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. Digital audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks. Some audio signals may not be output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks depending on the signal type. The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set HDMI I/P to ON in MANUAL SETUP to activate this feature (see page 86). • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly and HDCP ERROR appears in the front panel display as if the DVI monitors do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. IN 1 DVD Player HDMI out IN 2 Cable TV or Satellite tuner HDMI out HDMI in OUT Video monitor HDMI (U.S.A. model) 23 PREPARATION Notes • • • • CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connecting a DVD player HDMI out Optical out Audio out Coaxial out DVD player Video out R C O DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR COAXIAL VIDEO S VIDEO R VIDEO L AUDIO L DVD DVD DVD Video monitor OPTICAL DVD Video in IN 1 HDMI in MONITOR OUT IN 2 OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT MONITOR OUT HDMI OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) Note Check the availability of jacks on your DVD player and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output. However, in case you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable. 24 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting other video components HDMI out Optical out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out Video out R O L (U.S.A. model) COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR COAXIAL DVR/ VCR 2 VIDEO S VIDEO R VIDEO AUDIO PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT L Video monitor DTV OPTICAL CBL/ SAT CBL/ SAT IN VCR 1 IN 1 OUT CBL/SAT IN 2 OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT HDMI R C L R L Audio in Video out Video out DVD recorder or VCR Audio out Coaxial out HDMI in HDMI out Note Check the availability of jacks on your other video components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output. However, in case you make an HDMI connection, you can make both audio and video connections using a single HDMI cable. 25 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. If you set INPUT CH to 8ch in MULTI CH SET (see page 84), you can use the input jacks assigned as FRONT in MULTI CH SET (see page 84) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) AUDIO R AUDIO L R L (PLAY) IN DVD SURROUND SURROUND MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) (PLAY) SUBWOOFER CENTER SUBWOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT CBL/ SAT IN CD-R IN OUT (REC) R L Subwoofer out R R L L Subwoofer out VCR 1 R L OUT Center out Center out CD IN DVR/VCR 2 Multi-format player/ Front External decoder Surround out out Surround back out Multi-format player/ Surround out R External decoder L Front out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output. ■ Connecting to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O VIDEO/AUX L Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S-video out 26 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components O Optical in Optical in MD recorder or tape deck CD recorder Audio in Audio out R O L R Audio out L Audio in R L R L PREPARATION (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL R AUDIO L (PLAY) IN MD/TAPE CD CD OPTICAL OUT (REC) (PLAY) IN CD-R OUT (REC) GND CD PHONO MD/TAPE CD-R DIGITAL OUTPUT R L R L Audio out Audio out Optical out O Coaxial out CD player GND C Turntable Notes • Check the availability of jacks on your audio components and select one type of connection for audio/video input/output. • PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 27 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signal output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is set to ZONE B (see page 87), signals will only be output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. 1 2 FRONT PRE OUT R L SURROUND R SUBWOOFER L CENTER 5 3 4 SINGLE (SB) R L SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals output at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the correct speakers. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. • Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET settings (see page 78). 28 CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) TUNER FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. GND AM ANT PREPARATION Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. (U.S.A. model) ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. Notes 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. 29 CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power cable to an AC wall outlet. Turning on and off this unit When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. 1,4 2,3 (U.S.A. model) CAUTION Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as doing so may result in fire hazard or electrical shock. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE EFFECT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A YPAO ON/OFF OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX AC IN ON 1 100W MAX.TOTAL SWITCHED AC OUTLETS OFF Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on the power of this unit. • Only this unit is turned on. • Zone 2 and Zone 3 are set to the standby mode. MASTER ON 2 (U.S.A. model) OFF Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) Use these 2 outlets to supply power to any connected components. Connect the AC power cables of your other components to these 2 outlets. Power to these 2 outlets is supplied when the main room, Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on. However, power to these 2 outlets is cut off when the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off or when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to the OFF position. The maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these 2 outlets is 100 W. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet for more than one week. 30 STANDBY ON/OFF Front panel or Remote control CONNECTIONS 3 Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) to turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3. Setting the speaker impedance Follow the procedure below to change the impedance setting for all speakers. CAUTION POWER ON/OFF or Front panel Remote control If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6 ohms before using this unit. 1 y Note MASTER ON 2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF and ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 4 OFF Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on the power of this unit. SP IMP.–8ΩMIN appears in the front panel display. Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. This unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off. STRAIGHT MASTER EFFECT ON OFF MASTER ON ADVANCED SETUP SP IMP.-8 MIN OFF 3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select the impedance of your speakers. STRAIGHT EFFECT • Select 6 ohms if you are using 6 ohm speakers. 4 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. This unit will be set to the standby mode. MASTER ON OFF Note You can also set the speaker impedance by using the SP IMP. parameter in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see page 90). 31 PREPARATION • When MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER or STANDBY on the remote control to turn on or set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode simultaneously. • For details about controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 using the remote control, see page 106. Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS A Notes YPAO DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. SIZE Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel. EQ Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. LEVEL Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. 32 SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • If the AUTO SETUP procedure stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 115. WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. B PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO EFFECT ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EDIT CATEGORY ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX Notes • After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position AUTO SETUP Using AUTO SETUP 1 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the AUTO SETUP procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU SRCH MODE TV y Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP and then press ENTER once to enter the main menu. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. CROSSOVER HIGH CUT VOLUME MAX MIN 2 PREPARATION • You can run AUTO SETUP using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the AUTO SETUP procedure. • If an error occurs during the AUTO SETUP procedure and an error message appears in the front panel display, see pages 115 and 116 for a complete list of error messages and proper remedies. • If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. SET MENU MAX MIN . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP . ;INFORMATION Subwoofer POWER TV AV A XM STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE PURE DIRECT MENU SRCH MODE BAND NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R ON SCREEN RETURN STRAIGHT VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 1 2-9 DISPLAY XM MEMORY DTV p p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter LEVEL POWER EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 MOVIE PRESET/CH DVD SELECT A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. ENTER AMP + + + SOURCE TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP PRESET EXIT TV 1 REC A-E/CAT. DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME PURE DIRECT (U.S.A. model) 3 Press n to select SETUP and then press l / h to select: AUTO To automatically perform the entire AUTO SETUP procedure. RELOAD To restore the last AUTO SETUP setting. Note RELOAD is available only when you have previously run the AUTO SETUP procedure. 33 AUTO SETUP 4 ■ If you selected AUTO in step 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE, EQ or LEVEL. The RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set. RESULT:EXIT 1 AUTO:MENU p p p 5 7 When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is selected, press l / h to select: p WARNING 0 RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 6.10m . LVL :-10.0/ +6.5dB . >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter .SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO WIRING;;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;;CHECK EQ;;;;;;;;;;NATURAL LEVEL;;;;;;;CHECK START []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Press k / n to select RESULT and then press ENTER to display the AUTO SETUP results. CHECK To automatically check and adjust the selected item. RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK Results of the speaker connection and wiring SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return Note RESULT:DISTANCE1 When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure that SML or SMLx2 is selected in SPEAKER SET (see page 78) and that 80Hz is selected in CROSS OVER (see page 79). FRONT L;;;;4.5m CENTER;;;;;5.2m FRONT R;;;;4.8m PRNS L;;;;;5.2m PRNS R;;;;;5.3m Results of the speaker distance from the listening position [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return When EQ is selected, press l / h to select: NATURAL To average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the FLAT setting sounds a little harsh. RESULT:SIZE FRONT L;;;;;;LRG [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return FLAT To average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. RESULT:EQ CENTER 1:100Hz;;;+2.5dB 2:300Hz;;;-0.5dB 3:1.5kHz;;+0.5dB 4:1.8kHz;;+2.5dB 5:1.8kHz;;-3.5dB 6:2.5kHz;;+2.5dB 7:10kHz;;;+2.5dB [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return FRONT To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. Press n to select START and then press ENTER. Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and WAIT appears during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Note If E-10:INTERNAL ERROR appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3. 34 Results of the parametric equalizer of each speaker RESULT:LEVEL1 FRONT L;;;+1.0dB CENTER;;;;-1.5dB FRONT R;;;+6.5dB PRNS L;;;-10.0dB PRNS R;;;;+1.0dB SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. 6 Results of the frequency response of each speaker Results of the volume level of each speaker [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return y • Press l / h repeatedly to move between each display. • If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust each setup parameter, run MANUAL SETUP (see page 75). AUTO SETUP ■ If you selected RELOAD in step 3 Notes The RESULT:EXIT display appears. • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run AUTO SETUP again to re-calibrate your system. • In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the EQ results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. 7 p p 9 Make sure that the pointer is pointing at SET and CANCEL and then press l / h to select SET or CANCEL. 8 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. The SET MENU screen appears in the OSD. SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP . ;INFORMATION []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 10 • Select SET to confirm the AUTO SETUP results. • Select CANCEL to cancel the AUTO SETUP results. p • Select SET to confirm the AUTO SETUP results. • Select CANCEL to cancel the AUTO SETUP results. Make sure that the pointer is pointing at SET and CANCEL and then press l / h to select SET or CANCEL. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. The SET MENU screen appears in the OSD. SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP . ;INFORMATION p p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 35 PREPARATION RESULT:EXIT WARNING 0 RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 6.10m . LVL :-10.0/ +6.5dB . >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Press ENTER to return to the RESULT:EXIT screen. p 8 RESULT:EXIT WARNING 0 RESULT . SP : 5/4/0.1 . DIST: 4.50/ 6.10m . LVL :-10.0/ +6.5dB . >SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PLAYBACK PLAYBACK CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. Basic operations (U.S.A. model) 2 Turn on the power of the video monitor connected to this unit. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the respective speakers are turned on or off. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE EFFECT INPUT ZONE CONTROL ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A ON B YPAO ON/OFF SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF SPEAKERS A SPEAKERS B +10 or A 1 4 7 3 LEVEL POWER POWER TV AV A XM POWER STANDBY AUDIO SEL 1 PRESET/CH 6 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE Front panel When bi-wiring, select both A and B. NIGHT AUDIO ENTER Remote control Note PURE DIRECT SLEEP ENT. B A-E/CAT. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R ON SCREEN RETURN 4 DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE PRESET EXIT MOVIE DVD AMP TOP EFFECT STEREO SELECT 6 STRAIGHT DISPLAY XM MEMORY 1 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. 7 4 3 REC Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO TV LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME PURE DIRECT Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. V-AUX DTV Front panel CD MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD V-AUX SP A Front panel AMP POWER TV Remote control DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV INPUT: A.SEL: DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DVD AUTO CD PHONO TUNER XM dB VOLUME L R Name of the currently selected input source or SOURCE Remote control The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and on the video monitor for a few seconds. ON/OFF 36 TUNER or (U.S.A. model) 1 PHONO INPUT 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. See page 46 for details about tuning instructions. PLAYBACK 6 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME + VOLUME or – Remote control Front panel 7 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or press one of the sound field program buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and on the video monitor. See page 64 for details about sound field programs. or STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 Front panel MOVIE Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital and DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital and DTS programs. When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital and DTS, sometimes you may see a brief message in the front panel display which will read “Dial Norm X dB” (X being a numeric value). The display is showing how the program level relates with THX calibration level. If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust the volume. DialNorm;;+4dB For example, if you see the following message: “Dial Norm + 4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the overall output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume control by 4dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the playback loudness is preset, you can choose your preferred volume setting for best enjoyment. A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Remote control Name of the sound field category V-AUX HiFi DSP SP A DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD MUSIC Hall in Vienna PHONO TUNER XM dB VOLUME L R Program name Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. 37 BASIC OPERATION PROGRAM ■ Notes on Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) PLAYBACK Additional operations ■ Adjusting the tonal quality Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front L/R and center speaker channels. 1 ■ Muting the sound output Use this feature to mute the sound output. 1 Press MUTE on the remote control. The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display. Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS. MUTE MUTE Flashes TONE CONTROL 2 2 Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to resume the sound output. The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. + MUTE or VOLUME PROGRAM – y 3 Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS and cancel the tone control. TONE CONTROL Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R and center speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (see page 40) or PURE DIRECT (see page 41) is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. 38 You can adjust how much the muting function reduces the sound output (see page 82). ■ Using SILENT CINEMA Use this feature to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Note SILENT CINEMA is ineffective in the following cases: – MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input mode. – PURE DIRECT is selected. – A 2ch Stereo program is selected. – This unit is in the STRAIGHT mode. PLAYBACK ■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT Auto AUTO If a signal flag can be recognized, the unit selects the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the signal flag cannot be recognized, or no flag is present in the input signal, this unit cannot automatically play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel or MULTI CH IN on the remote control so that MULTI CH INPUT appears in the front panel display and on the video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Decoders You can select a decoder from the following list depending on the format of the software you are playing. Remote control PLIIxMovie To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic x movie decoder. Note PLIIxMusic To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic x music decoder. EX/ES To play back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. ■ Enjoying multi-channel software in 6.1/7.1 channel surround EX To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic x, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback. AMP EXTD SUR. SOURCE 8 TV 2 Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder when the name of a decoder (PL xMovie, for example) is displayed in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. OFF To play back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1 channels. y When SB L/R SP is set to LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 79), the surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag which cannot be automatically detected. When you play these kinds of discs in 6.1-channel, select decoders (PL xMovie, PL xMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is pressed in the following cases: – When SUR. L/R SP or SB L/R SP is set to NONE (see page 79). – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks are being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround L/R channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when SB L/R SP is set to NONE (see page 79). • PL xMovie cannot be selected when SB L/R SP is set to LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 79). 39 BASIC OPERATION When MULTI CH INPUT is shown in the front panel display and the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector buttons on the remote control), press MULTI CH INPUT so that MULTI CH INPUT disappears from the front panel display and the video monitor. PLAYBACK ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround Decoder types for the Enhanced, MOVIE THEATER or THX program Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back in multiple channels. 1 <PRO LOGIC> Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control to switch between the Surround and Enhanced programs. <PLIIx Movie> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software. <Neo:6 Cinema> DTS processing for movie software. AMP STANDARD SOURCE 6 TV You can also press MOVIE or THX on the remote control to select the MOVIE THEATER or THX programs. MOVIE THX 4 2 or 5 Press SELECT on the remote control to select a decoder. SELECT 7 You can select a decoder from the following list depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. Decoder types for the Surround program <PRO LOGIC> Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. <PLIIx Movie> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software. <PLIIx Music> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software. <PLIIx Game> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software. <Neo:6 Cinema> DTS processing for movie software. <Neo:6 Music> DTS processing for music software. 40 y • You can also select a decoder by using DECODER MODE in INPUT MENU (see page 84). • You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message display. Note The Pro Logic x decoder automatically changes to the Pro Logic decoder when SB L/R SP is set to NONE (see page 79). PLAYBACK ■ Using PURE DIRECT ■ Using the night listening modes PURE DIRECT bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit as well as shuts down the video circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity from analog and PCM sources. The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volume levels or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of source you are playing. Notes Notes 1 • You cannot use the night listening modes if PURE DIRECT or MULTI CH INPUT are being used or if headphones are connected even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and the surround sound settings being used. 1 AMP NIGHT SOURCE NIGHT Lights up • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volume levels. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select NIGHT:OFF if you do not want to use this function. PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT or Remote control 2 Note The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. 2 AUDIO TV Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on the remote control to activate pure direct. The indicator around the button on the front panel lights up and the front panel display automatically goes out. Front panel Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC. When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in the PURE DIRECT mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL on the front panel and the OSD menu settings are ineffective in the PURE DIRECT mode. • The following operations are not possible in the PURE DIRECT mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the short message – adjusting OSD menu parameters – all video functions including video conversions – HDMI digital video up-conversion of analog video signals – HDMI features including digital input and output • PURE DIRECT is automatically canceled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. Press l / h to adjust the effect level of compression while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. Choices: MIN, MID, MAX Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel or on the remote control again to deactivate pure direct. The indicator around the button on the front panel goes out and the previous settings are restored. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT or Front panel Effect.Lvl:MID Remote control • Select MIN for minimum compression. • Select MID for standard compression. • Select MAX for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC settings are stored independently. 41 PLAYBACK ■ Using the sleep timer ■ Downmixing to 2 channels Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLETS. You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multichannel sources. 1 2 Select an input source and start playback on the source component. Rotate the PROGRAM selector (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. 2ch Stereo appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. Front panel SLEEP or Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF AMP STEREO SOURCE SLEEP 90min SLEEP 30min 1 TV SLEEP 60min Remote control The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD SLEEP 120min SLEEP00120min SP A PHONO TUNER XM L R SLEEP The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 SP A 3 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD MUSIC Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP PHONO TUNER XM dB VOLUME L R SLEEP Press SLEEP repeatedly so that SLEEP OFF appears in the front panel display. SLEEP V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD Note You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT (see page 78). ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals When the unit is in the STRAIGHT mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output only from the front L/R speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straightly into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 1 MD/TAPE CD-R SLEEP OFF SP A 2ch Stereo dB VOLUME CD PHONO TUNER Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel or on the remote control to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT appears in the front panel display. XM STRAIGHT dB VOLUME L R STRAIGHT SLEEP or After a few seconds, SLEEP OFF disappears, and the SLEEP indicator turns off. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel) to set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. 42 EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control PLAYBACK 2 ■ Selecting audio input modes Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel or on the remote control again to turn the sound effect back on. STRAIGHT disappears from the front panel display. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. If you set SUR. L/R SP to NONE (see page 78), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can select the type of input signal you want to use. Note This feature is not available if no digital input jacks (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, HDMI is not available as an input mode if HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks are not assigned. Use I/O ASSIGNMENT in INPUT MENU to reassign the respective input jacks (see page 83). Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or AUDIO SEL on the remote control to select an input mode. AUDIO SELECT or Front panel Note ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine images from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can listen to classical music while enjoying beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then select an audio source. Audio sources PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Video sources Note If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel or on the remote control. V-AUX SP A DVR/VCR 2 POWER XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP TUNER CD MULTI CH IN POWER TV AV A PHONO Remote control VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV INPUT: A.SEL: DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DVD AUTO CD PHONO TUNER XM dB VOLUME L R Type of the input mode AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) HDMI 2) Digital signals* 3) Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. If no HDMI signals are input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Selects digital signals input at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks. Use if HDMI signals are also being input. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. 43 BASIC OPERATION Virtual CINEMA DSP is ineffective even if SUR. L/R SP is set to NONE (see page 78) in the following cases: – If MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – If headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. STANDBY POWER PLAYBACK y Audio information • We recommend using AUTO in most cases. • You can designate the default input mode to be selected when the power of this unit is turned on (see page 86). FORMAT Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Notes • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. • The input jacks not assigned are not available as input modes. SAMPLING Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “?” appears. CHANNEL Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. ■ Displaying information about the input source You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. 1 BITRATE Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “– – –” appears. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top SET MENU screen appears in the OSD. DIALOGUE Dialogue normalization information for Dolby Digital and DTS signals. AMP SET MENU MENU SOURCE FLAG Flag data encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS and PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. SRCH MODE TV SET MENU Video information . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP . ;INFORMATION HDMI Signal Type Type of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. 2 p p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter HDMI Resolution Resolution of the HDMI signals input or output at the HDMI IN/OUT jacks of this unit. Press n repeatedly to select INFORMATION and then press ENTER. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Analog Resolution Resolution of the analog signals input or output at the video component jacks of this unit. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. 3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again to exit. SET MENU MENU The following information appears in the OSD. Note Press l / h to toggle between the audio and video information displays. 44 SRCH MODE RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for those components. (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE EFFECT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A YPAO ON/OFF OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER ON B SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF 2 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. See page 30 for details. 2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press one of the input selector buttons) to select the input source you want to record from. INPUT Front panel or A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD AMP Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. Notes • The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 can be selected separately. • When this unit is in the standby mode, you cannot record from other components connected to this unit. • The settings for TONE CONTROL (see page 38), VOLUME, SP LEVEL (see page 80) and programs do not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video or only a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or only a composite video signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT L/R jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN L/R jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. For example, the signal input at VCR 1 IN is not output at VCR 1 OUT. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • Some HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit may not be output at the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) jacks depending on the type of those HDMI audio signals. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. SOURCE TV Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ■ Notes on the DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded in DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. 45 BASIC OPERATION 1 y FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING Automatic tuning 3 Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE (U.S.A. model) AUTO AUTO/MAN'L Lights up PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A YPAO ON/OFF OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER ON EFFECT INPUT B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF PRESET/ TUNING EDIT 43 2 3 1 1 SEARCH MODE Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. Preset station group and number V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 Reception band CBL/SAT DTV DVD Frequency of the received station MD/TAPE CD-R CD A1:AM 1070 kHz Sci-Fi INPUT SP A PHONO TUNER XM AUTO dB VOLUME L R Name of the sound field program Front panel 4 or AMP TUNER Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency. Press l to tune into a lower frequency. SOURCE PRESET/TUNING/CH TV Remote control 2 Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on the remote control) to select the reception band. FM or AM appears in the front panel display. FM/AM LEVEL or DISPLAY BAND Front panel Remote control or 46 TITLE V-AUX SP A DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R A1:AM 1530 kHz Sci-Fi CD PHONO TUNER AUTO XM TUNED dB VOLUME L R When the unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. FM/AM TUNING Manual tuning Automatic preset tuning Manual tuning is effective when stations signals are weak. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 2 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning” to select TUNER and the reception band. You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals and store up to 40 (8 stations in each of the 5 groups, A1 to E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Note You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input source. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. (U.S.A. model) TUNING MODE PURE DIRECT AUTO/MAN'L VOLUME If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in the PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE EFFECT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A YPAO ON/OFF OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF PRESET/ TUNING 1 32 EDIT SEARCH MODE 1 V-AUX SP A DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R A1:AM 1070 kHz Straight CD PHONO TUNER XM Press FM/AM on the front panel (or BAND on the remote control) to select FM as the reception band. dB VOLUME L FM/AM R or LEVEL TITLE DISPLAY 3 Front panel Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to manually tune into the desired station. Press h to tune into a higher frequency. Press l to tune into a lower frequency. PRESET/TUNING/CH y Press and hold the button to continue searching. 2 BAND Remote control Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN'L Lights up 47 BASIC OPERATION ON B SILENT CINEMA FM/AM TUNING 3 ■ Customized automatic preset tuning Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel for more than 3 seconds. The preset group and number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the currently selected frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V-AUX SP A DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R C8:FM 87.5 MHz Straight CD PHONO TUNER XM AUTO MEMORY dB VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. You can specify a preset station group and a preset station number from which this unit stores the FM stations received by automatic preset tuning. 1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING/ CH l / h on the front panel to select the preset station group and the preset station number where the first received station will be stored. For example, if you select C5, the first received station is automatically programmed to C5 and the next received stations are sequentially programmed to C6, C7, etc. A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH CATEGORY Notes • Any station data stored under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the preset number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after programming all available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it by following the procedure in “Manual preset tuning”. 48 Note Automatic preset tuning stops when the received stations have all been stored up to E8. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet for more than one week. FM/AM TUNING Manual preset tuning 3 You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations in each of the 5 groups, A1 to E8) manually. Note Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. You must first set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input source. A/B/C/D/E CATEGORY (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT Preset station group VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO V-AUX SP A 2,5 4 DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD A :AM 630 kHz Sci-Fi SP A CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO TUNER XM PHONO TUNER XM TUNED dB VOLUME L TUNED MEMORY dB VOLUME L R Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH h on the front panel to select a higher preset station number. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l on the front panel to select a lower preset station number. R PRESET/TUNING/CH When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the received station. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel. The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. V-AUX SP A MEMORY MEMORY DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R C3:AM 630 kHz Sci-Fi CD PHONO TUNER XM TUNED MEMORY dB VOLUME L R MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 49 BASIC OPERATION Repeat steps in “Automatic tuning” or “Manual tuning” to tune into a station automatically or manually. See page 46 for tuning instructions. V-AUX VCR 1 C :AM 630 kHz Sci-Fi VIDEO/AUX 4 DVR/VCR 2 OPTICAL OFF 3 1 B YPAO ON/OFF MASTER ON EFFECT INPUT FM/AM TUNING 5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MEMORY Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. Note Prior to selecting a preset station, you should preset stations first. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning” on page 47 or “Manual preset tuning” on page 49. MAN'L/AUTO FM (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT V-AUX SP A DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R C3:AM 630 kHz Sci-Fi CD PHONO TUNER XM VOLUME TUNED AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT VOLUME L TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE EFFECT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE R A SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. B YPAO ON/OFF ON 6 PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E dB S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF 1 2 3 Notes TV MUTE PHONO • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. V-AUX TUNER CBL/SAT CD MD/TAPE MULTI CH IN 1 CD-R TV INPUT PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE MUTE SET MENU 21 VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 2 NIGHT AUDIO ENTER DTV PURE DIRECT MENU SRCH MODE BAND DVD A-E/CAT. STRAIGHT ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY 3 EFFECT XM MEMORY (U.S.A. model) 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT Front panel or AMP TUNER SOURCE TV Remote control 2 Press A/B/C/D/E (or l / h on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E CATEGORY Front panel 50 or ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control FM/AM TUNING 3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET k / n on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 through 8). The preset group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station E1 with A5. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT CATEGORY PRESET/TUNING/CH MAIN ZONE or MASTER DTV DVD PROGRAM MD/TAPE CD-R E1:FM 87.5 MHz Sci-Fi CD PHONO TUNER XM TUNED dB VOLUME L B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF 1,3 1,3 2,4 1 SP A OPTIMIZER MIC Remote control Front panel CBL/SAT ZONE CONTROL MULTI ZONE A ON VCR 1 ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS YPAO ON/OFF DVR/VCR 2 EFFECT INPUT ENTER A-E/CAT. V-AUX SEARCH MODE R (U.S.A. model) Select preset station E1 by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. CATEGORY 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. E1 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. PRESET/ TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE V-AUX CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO TUNER XM TUNED MEMORY dB VOLUME L R Select preset station A5 by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. A5 and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO TUNER XM TUNED MEMORY A5:FM 90.6 MHz Sci-Fi SP A 4 VCR 1 E1:FM 87.5 MHz Sci-Fi SP A 3 DVR/VCR 2 dB VOLUME L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET/ TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE V-AUX SP A DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE EDIT E1-A5 Sci-Fi CD-R CD PHONO TUNER XM TUNED dB VOLUME L R 51 BASIC OPERATION PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING What is XM Satellite Radio? XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes more than 150 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide. XM Satellite Radio connections Connect the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear of this unit. (For details, refer to the operating instructions provided with the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory). (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR COAXIAL DVD CD DVD DVR/ VCR 2 DTV OPTICAL CD CBL/ SAT DVD Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on page 54. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com”. DTV RS-232C IN 1 MONITOR OUT CBL/SAT MD/TAPE IN 2 CD-R OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT XM HDMI ■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc. Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold separately. Premium Channel available at additional monthly cost. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com. Only available in the 48 continuous United States. © 2005 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 52 XM jack Notes • For information on obtaining the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com” or consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products. • To ensure the optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio controls and functions This section describes the functions of each control used for XM Satellite Radio tuning. Note The following controls are only available when XM is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select XM as the input source. ■ Front panel functions AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT 34 5 2 1 PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E ■ Remote control functions FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD EDIT CATEGORY SEARCH MODE DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS EFFECT ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A YPAO B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO LEVEL 1 2 3 SELECT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES SET MENU MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. ON SCREEN RETURN STRAIGHT 4 5 DISPLAY EFFECT XM MEMORY STEREO OPTICAL PRESET/CH TITLE MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 6 VIDEO/AUX (U.S.A. model) 2 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (All Channel Search mode) Searches a radio channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches a radio channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8). 3 SEARCH MODE Switches between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 56). 4 DISPLAY Switches XM information such as channel number/name, category or artist name/song title displayed in the front panel display (see page 60). 5 MEMORY Switches the unit to the preset memory mode. 0 EON A SPEAKERS B +10 MODE ENT. 7 PTY SEEK START 1 XM Selects XM as the input source. 2 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h (All Channel Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH k / n to search a radio channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH k / n to search a radio channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. l / h to change the preset group (A to E). Press PRESET/CH k / n to change the preset number (1 to 8). 3 XM MEMORY Switches the unit to the preset memory mode. 4 SRCH MODE Switches between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 56.). 5 DISPLAY Switches XM information such as channel number/name, category or artist name/song title displayed in the front panel display (see page 60). 6 Numeric buttons (All Channel Search or Category Search mode) Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly. (Preset Search mode) Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly. 7 ENT. Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct Number Access mode (see page 58). 53 BASIC OPERATION 1 CATEGORY (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category to next one (while staying in the All Channel Search mode). (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category to next one. (Preset Search mode) Switches between five preset groups (A to E). (U.S.A. model) 9 FREQ/TEXT XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control functions 1 2 DTV CD CD-R 2 3 CBL/SAT MD/TAPE STANDBY PHONO 4 5 6 ENT VCR1 DVR/VCR2 DVD V-AUX 7 8 9 0 3 4 5 6 A-E/CAT. k POWER XM TUNER k k 1 DISPLAY PRESET/CH ALL k CAT. PRESET ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ID1 ID2 7 8 9 NUMBER Activating XM Satellite Radio To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required. Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and then access the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com/” or call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a major credit card for signing up. (U.S.A. model) 1 XM Selects XM as the input source. PURE DIRECT VOLUME 2 Input selector/numeric buttons (All Channel Search or Category Search mode) Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly. (Preset Search mode) Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly. AUDIO SELECT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE EFFECT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER ON B YPAO ON/OFF VIDEO PHONES 1 1 S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF Note To enter numbers, you must press and hold SHIFT before you press any of these buttons. MULTI CH INPUT 3 Rotate the INPUT selector (or set AMP/ SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select XM as the input source. The XM indicator lights up. 3 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h (All Channel Search mode) Press l / h to change the channel category. Press k / n to search a radio channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Press l / h to change the channel category. Press k / n to search a radio channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Press l / h to change the preset group (A to E). Press k / n to change the preset number (1 to 8). INPUT Front panel or AMP XM SOURCE 4 ALL Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 56). TV 5 ENT Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct Number Access mode (see page 58). 6 NUMBER Press and hold before you press the input selector/numeric buttons to switch the function to entering numbers. 7 DISPLAY Switches XM information such as channel number/name, category or artist name/song title displayed in the front panel display (see page 60). 8 PRESET Selects the Preset Search mode (see page 57). 9 CAT. Selects the Category Search mode (see page 57) 54 Remote control V-AUX SP A DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R INPUT: XM Sci-Fi CD PHONO TUNER AUTO dB VOLUME L R XM XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 2 Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level and adjust the orientation of the XM Satellite Radio antenna for a better percentage of the reception level. Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode (U.S.A. model) y You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by using the ANTENNA parameter in XM RADIO SET (see page 88). PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A 3 YPAO OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER ON B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF 1 Rotate the INPUT selector (or press XM on the remote control) to select XM as the input source. Information (such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the channel currently selected appears in the front panel display and the XM indicator lights up. INPUT PRESET/CH XM or PRESET/TUNING/CH or ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control Front panel Front panel Remote control V-AUX Note SP A You cannot select channel 0 if the All Channel Search mode (see page 56) is not selected. 4 DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R [001] Preview Sci-Fi CD PHONO TUNER XM AUTO dB VOLUME L R y Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display and write it down. • Selecting the XM band automatically recalls the channel previously selected. • You can change the kind of channel information by pressing DISPLAY repeatedly (see page 60). ID:_____________________________________ Note The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. 55 BASIC OPERATION Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select channel 0. EFFECT INPUT ON/OFF Notes • If CHECK ANTENNA appears in the front panel display, the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit properly. See “XM Satellite Radio connections” on page 52 and check the connection. • The ANTENNA parameter cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Using XM Satellite Radio search modes 3 To change the channel category, press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly. You can search for the channel you want to listen to using one of three search modes. You can also enter the number directly to select the desired channel. For details, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 58. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E or ENTER CATEGORY ■ All Channel Search mode A-E/CAT. (U.S.A. model) Front panel Remote control PURE DIRECT 4 VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE ZONE CONTROL ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A YPAO OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER ON EFFECT INPUT ON/OFF B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO PHONES AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF To search a channel within all channels, press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH 3 4 2 PRESET/TUNING/CH or ENTER A-E/CAT. 1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 55. Front panel 2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select ALL CH SEARCH. PRESET/ TUNING SET MENU EDIT MENU or SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel V-AUX SP A 56 DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 Remote control CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD ALL CH SEARCH0 Sci-Fi PHONO TUNER AUTO dB VOLUME L R XM Remote control y You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/ CH k / n on the remote control). XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Category Search mode ■ Preset Search mode (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you should preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 59. All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls 001 Preview by the factory setting. EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE EFFECT INPUT PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER ON B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO PHONES (U.S.A. model) ZONE CONTROL ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS YPAO ON/OFF AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX OFF PURE DIRECT VOLUME 4 2 3 AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L SEARCH MODE ZONE CONTROL ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A YPAO OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 55. ON B SILENT CINEMA Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select CAT SEARCH. PRESET/ TUNING SET MENU or SEARCH MODE ZONE 3 L R PHONES AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO/AUX 4 2 1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 55. 2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select PRESET SEARCH. SRCH MODE Front panel ZONE 2 VIDEO Remote control PRESET/ TUNING SET MENU V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CAT SEARCH Sci-Fi SP A CD PHONO TUNER AUTO Front panel dB To change the channel category, press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH or DVR/VCR 2 3 ENTER VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PRESET SEARCH Sci-Fi SP A A/B/C/D/E CATEGORY Remote control R V-AUX 3 SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE XM VOLUME L MENU or EDIT PHONO TUNER XM AUTO dB VOLUME L R To change the preset group (A to E), press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH A-E/CAT. A/B/C/D/E Front panel Remote control CATEGORY or ENTER A-E/CAT. 4 To search a channel within the selected channel category, press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH Front panel 4 Remote control To change the preset number (1 to 8), press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH PRESET/TUNING/CH ENTER or A-E/CAT. PRESET/TUNING/CH or ENTER A-E/CAT. Front panel Remote control Front panel y You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/ CH k / n on the remote control). Remote control y You can also select the preset number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. 57 BASIC OPERATION MENU EDIT S VIDEO OFF 3 2 EFFECT INPUT ON/OFF 1 TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Direct Number Access mode LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 3 PURE DIRECT 2 NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. ON-SCREEN RETURN STRAIGHT Press the numeric buttons to enter the desired channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. DISPLAY EFFECT XM MEMORY STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON MOVIE A SPEAKERS B +10 MODE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 3 4 ENT. The display changes as follows. PTY SEEK START (U.S.A. model) V-AUX 1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 55. 2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select ALL CH SEARCH or CAT SEARCH. PRESET/ TUNING Front panel SP A V-AUX VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO TUNER XM CD-R CD DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE PHONO TUNER XM AUTO dB VOLUME L CD-R CD PHONO R TUNER XM AUTO dB VOLUME L R VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE <XM>123 Sci-Fi CD-R CD PHONO TUNER XM AUTO dB VOLUME L R AUTO dB L R 4 CAT SEARCH Sci-Fi DVR/VCR 2 VOLUME or SP A MD/TAPE Remote control ALL CH SEARCH0 Sci-Fi DVR/VCR 2 DVD SRCH MODE SP A V-AUX DTV <XM> -12 Sci-Fi SP A V-AUX SP A CBL/SAT MENU or SEARCH MODE DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 <XM> --1 Sci-Fi SET MENU EDIT V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 PHONO TUNER AUTO dB VOLUME L R XM If you enter fewer than three numbers, you may press ENT. to tune to the channel immediately or wait a few seconds to confirm the entered channel number. ENT. y • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after entering one-digit or two-digit number, the unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than numeric buttons or ENT. cancels the direct number access procedure. 58 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels 3 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (eight preset numbers in five preset groups, A1 to E8). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 57. While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) to select a preset group (A to E). The group letter appears. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E or (U.S.A. model) ENTER CATEGORY A-E/CAT. PURE DIRECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY DISPLAY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L Remote control Front panel VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EDIT CATEGORY MAIN ZONE SEARCH MODE ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MULTI ZONE A YPAO OPTIMIZER MIC MASTER ON B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO PHONES AUDIO V-AUX OPTICAL DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT C VIDEO/AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD [040] Deep Tra Sci-Fi SP A L R PRESET/CH PRESET/TUNING/CH PHONO TUNER ENTER A-E/CAT. XM AUTO dB VOLUME L R Front panel When the channel number 040 is selected V-AUX 2 XM AUTO MEMORY While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select a preset number (1 to 8). or DVR/VCR 2 TUNER dB VOLUME Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control) when XM is selected as the input source. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for about five seconds. DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 Remote control CBL/SAT C5 SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD [040] Deep Sci-Fi PHONO TUNER XM AUTO MEMORY dB VOLUME L R Preset number MEMORY RETURN MAN'L/AUTO FM or Front panel XM MEMORY Remote control MEMORY Flashes 59 BASIC OPERATION 4 Search the XM Satellite Radio channel you want to set as a preset channel. To search the desired channel, carry out “All Channel Search mode” on page 56, “Category Search mode” on page 57, or “Direct Number Access mode” on page 58. V-AUX PHONO Preset group 2,5 4 DTV [040] Deep Sci-Fi SP A OFF 3 1 EFFECT INPUT ON/OFF XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 5 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control) to preset the selected XM Satellite Radio channel. A colon appears next to the preset number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off. Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display XM information (such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the channel currently selected in the OSD and in the front panel display. MEMORY y RETURN or MAN'L/AUTO FM You can select the amount of time while the XM Satellite Radio information is displayed in the OSD (see page 88). XM MEMORY Front panel Remote control Note V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD C5: [040] Deep Sci-Fi SP A PHONO TUNER XM If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display, see TROUBLESHOOTING on page 113. AUTO dB VOLUME L R Colon appears Note ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control. The following screen is displayed in the OSD. Presetting a new channel clears the former preset channel stored in the same preset group and number. TUNING MODE ON SCREEN or DISPLAY AUTO/MAN'L Front panel Remote control XM INFORMATION p p ALL CH SEARCH XM : 012 CHAN : Deep Tracks CAT : Rock NAME : Led Zeppelin TITLE : StairwayToHeaven . ([012]Deep Tra) []/[]:CHANNEL [<]/[>]:CATEGORY Notes • To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD. • The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you change the XM Satellite Radio channel. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio information screen is being on hold. 60 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the following XM information display modes. TUNING MODE Channel name/number AUTO/MAN'L Front panel Channel category or ON SCREEN DISPLAY Artist name/Song title Remote control When the channel number/name is displayed: V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD [040] Deep Tra Sci-Fi SP A PHONO TUNER XM AUTO dB VOLUME L R BASIC OPERATION When the channel category is displayed: V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD <CAT>Rock Sci-Fi SP A PHONO TUNER XM AUTO dB VOLUME L R When the artist name/song title is displayed: V-AUX SP A DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD Coldplay / Clo Sci-Fi PHONO TUNER XM AUTO dB VOLUME L R y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. If the information contains more than 14 characters, the information scrolls from right to left. • If the information contains a character that cannot be recognized by the unit, the character will be displayed with an underbar “_”. 61 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. LEVEL ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: AV POWER STANDBY A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN 4,5 PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. ON SCREEN STRAIGHT DISPLAY XM MEMORY V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 MD/TAPE DVR/VCR2 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 EXTD. SUR DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – EFFECT CD-R THX SOURCE TV STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON 2 3 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START REC 1 DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME (U.S.A. model) Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. 1 Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. 2 62 POWER TV RETURN Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. POWER Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN DISPLAY y For details on selecting the OSD mode, see page 89. EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 3 Select the sound field program you want to adjust. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 MOVIE A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Sound field category MUSIC Cursor . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;31ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Parameters 4 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet for more than one week. ■ Resetting parameters to the factory values To reset a certain parameter Select the parameter you want to reset, then press l / h repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter name disappears from the video monitor. To reset all parameters Use PARAM. INI (see page 87). Parameter values Press k / n to select the parameters. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 5 Press l / h to change the parameter value. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. When you set a parameter to a value other than the factory preset, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to change other program parameters. Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set MEMORY GUARD to OFF (see page 86). 63 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 43) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked MULTI can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked 2-CH can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Basic operations” on page 36. Source Remote control button 1 3 Category and Program STEREO 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel sources as is. ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT Mono Movie CINEMA DSP processing. This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT Game CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. MOVIE THEATER Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. MULTI 2-CH 4 64 Features SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Source MULTI 2-CH Remote control button 5 MULTI 6 Features THX THX Cinema THX processing for movie software. THX THX Game THX processing for game software. THX THX Select2 Cinema THX Select2 processing for movie software. STANDARD DOLBY DIGITAL Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. STANDARD q D+PLIIx Movie Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. STANDARD DOLBY D EX Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. STANDARD DTS Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources. STANDARD DTS 96/24 Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. STANDARD DTS+PLIIx Movie Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic x) for DTS sources. STANDARD DTS+DOLBY EX Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. STANDARD DTS ES Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. STANDARD DTS 96/24 ES Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. STANDARD Enhanced CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder. STANDARD PRO LOGIC Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. STANDARD PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software. STANDARD PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software. STANDARD Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. STANDARD Enhanced CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 2-CH Category and Program 65 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Basic operations” on page 36. Source Remote control button 2 channel (left and right) playback. STEREO 7ch Stereo HiFi DSP processing. Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. MUSIC The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. MUSIC Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. 3 ENTERTAINMENT Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, immediate sound. 5 THX THX Music THX processing for all 5.1 encoded music sources. STANDARD q D+PLIIx Music Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources. STANDARD DTS+PLIIx Music Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources. STANDARD Enhanced CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder. STANDARD PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software. STANDARD Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. 2 MULTI 6 2-CH 66 Features STEREO 2ch Stereo 1 MULTI 2-CH Category and Program SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL (DSP level) Function: Description: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY / P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: Changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 to 99 ms Source sound Time INIT. DLY Level Level Level Early reflections INIT. DLY Time INIT. DLY Time Sound source SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE / P. ROOM SIZE (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Time Level Level Level Source sound Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 67 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS (Liveness) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as dead, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as live. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the liveness of the room. 0 to 10 Source sound Time Level Level Dead Level Live Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: Control range: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. 1 to 49 ms ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. 0.1 to 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: Control range: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. 0 to 10 ■ SB. INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay) Function: Control range: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. 1 to 49 ms ■ SB. ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size) Function: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. 0.1 to 2.0 ■ SB. LIVENESS (Surround back liveness) Function: Control range: 68 Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. 0 to 10 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV. TIME (Reverberation time) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. The longer the reverberation time, the more live the listening room environment seems. The shorter the reverberation time, the more dead the listening room environment seems. 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source REV.TIME Short reverberation 60 dB REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. 0 to 100% Source sound SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Level Function: Description: Control range: REV. LEVEL Time ■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation delay) Description: Control range: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. 0 to 250 ms Level Function: Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME 69 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DIALOG LIFT (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 For 7ch Stereo Function: Control range: Adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. 0 to 100% CT LEVEL (Center level) SL LEVEL (Surround left level) SR LEVEL (Surround right level) SB LEVEL (Surround back level) PL LEVEL (Presence left level) PR LEVEL (Presence right level) For PL x Music PANORAMA (Panorama) Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: OFF, ON DIMENSION (Dimension) Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard) CENTER WIDTH (Center width) Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3 For Neo:6 Music CENTER IMAGE (Center image) Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 70 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the following diagrams in the table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program. Note Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc. The abbreviations and symbols used in each diagram are as follows: L Front left speaker PL Presence left speaker SR Surround right speaker C Center speaker PR Presence right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker R Front right speaker SL Surround left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker Speaker from which sound is being output Speaker from which no sound is being output When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are turned off When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and Priority is set to PRNS (see page 79) *3 When the q EX / q PL IIx / ES indicators are lit up and Priority is set to SB (see page 79) *1 *2 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL STEREO 7ch Stereo PR C SBL SBR PL L SL L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R SR PR C SBL SBR R SR when surround back speakers are connected PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR when surround back speakers are not connected 71 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS STEREO 2ch Stereo 2-channel audio (stereo) SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS 2-channel audio (monaural) MUSIC Hall in Vienna The Bttm Line The Roxy Thtr ENTERTAINMENT Disco PL L SL MUSIC Pop/Rock ENTERTAINMENT Variety/Sports Mono Movie Game SBL SBR L L SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR SBL SBR SR SL L L SR SL SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL L PL L SL STANDARD DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DTS PR C SBL SBR L SR SL L PR C SBL SBR L SR SL PL SL SBL SBR SBL SBR L SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SR R SR R SR PR C SBL SBR PL R R PR C PL R SR PR C PL R R PR C PL R PR C PR C PL R PR C PL R SR PR C PL R L PR C PL R PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R PR C PR C PL R PR C PL R PL R L SR SL PRO LOGIC 72 SBL SBR PL R L PR C PL 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 R SR PR C SBL SBR R SR PRO LOGIC PR C PR C PL R PRO LOGIC L PL R PL SL MOVIE THEATER Enhanced DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DTS SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 R PR C PL SL THX THX Game SBL SBR PL R THX THX Select2 Cinema THX Music PR C PL R PL R PL L PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 R PL R PL L PL R PL SL THX THX Cinema THX Surround EX PR C 2-channel audio (stereo) PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PRO LOGIC PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS 2-channel audio (monaural) STANDARD PLIIx Movie PLII Music PLII Game PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL Movie/Game PL 2-channel audio (stereo) 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PR C SBL SBR R SR Movie/Music/Game PR C SBL SBR R SR Music MOVIE THEATER Enhanced PLII Movie PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR When Priority is set to PRNS PL SL PR C SBL SBR SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS L R SR When Priority is set to SB STANDARD Neo:6 Cinema Neo:6 Music PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Cinema PL L SL PL R PR C SBL SBR R SR Cinema/Music PR C SBL SBR R SR Music 73 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM SPEAKER LAYOUTS 2-channel audio (monaural) MOVIE THEATER Enhanced Neo:6 Cinema PL L SL PR C SBL SBR 2-channel audio (stereo) PL R L SR SL 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PR C SBL SBR R SR When Priority is set to PRNS PL L SL PR C SBL SBR R SR When Priority is set to SB STRAIGHT PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Monaural playback PURE DIRECT PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Monaural playback 74 PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R R SR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to manually adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. y You can run MANUAL SETUP using the system menu that appears in the OSD or in the front panel display. This manual uses the OSD illustrations to explain the MANUAL SETUP procedure. 1 BASIC MENU Use to manually adjust basic system parameters. Item Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output and the cross over frequency. 78 B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 80 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 80 D)THX SET Adjusts the THX settings. 81 E)TEST TONE Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE settings. 81 2 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32). y Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32). You can use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running AUTO SETUP first. Item Features Page Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 81 B)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 82 C)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 82 D)AUDIO SET Adjusts the overall audio settings for this unit. 82 E)HDMI SET Adjusts the HDMI support audio. 82 ADVANCED OPERATION A)EQUALIZER 3 INPUT MENU Use to manually reassign digital input and output, select the input mode, rename your input, or specify external input settings. Item Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 83 B)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input. 84 C)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 84 D)DECODER MODE Selects the input mode for the sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 84 E)MULTI CH SET Adjusts the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 84 75 MANUAL SETUP 4 OPTION MENU Use to manually adjust the optional system settings. Item Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the settings for the OSD and the front panel display and converts video signals. 85 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 86 C)AUDIO SELECT Selects the type of input signal to be used. 86 D)DECODER MODE Selects whether to initialize the settings or to recall the previous settings for the input mode selected in INPUT MENU. 86 E)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 87 F)ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals on the rear panel of this unit. 87 G)XM RADIO SET Adjusts the XM Satellite Radio settings. 88 76 MANUAL SETUP Using MANUAL SETUP 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME 1 SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TV Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu and then press ENTER to enter the selected menu item. Repeat this operation to enter the setup mode of the item you want to adjust. PRESET/CH LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE 1,5 SRCH MODE NIGHT AUDIO ENTER PRESET/CH PURE DIRECT MENU BAND 2-4 SET MENU ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. ON SCREEN RETURN A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. EFFECT XM MEMORY STEREO STRAIGHT DISPLAY MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 9 0 +10 5 A SPEAKERS B ENT. (U.S.A. model) 4 y Press l / h repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. You can change the MANUAL SETUP parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. PRESET/CH Note ENTER You cannot change some MANUAL SETUP parameters while the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter SET MENU. AMP SET MENU SOURCE A-E/CAT. 5 Press SET MENU (or press one of the sound field program group buttons) to exit SET MENU. MENU SRCH MODE STEREO TV SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 2 Press n to select MANUAL SETUP and then press ENTER to enter the selected category. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR 5 6 7 8 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet for more than one week. ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER A-E/CAT. or SET MENU ;AUTO SETUP . ;MANUAL SETUP . ;INFORMATION p p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 77 MANUAL SETUP Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE Using BASIC MENU Use to manually adjust basic system parameters. 1 BASIC MENU 1/2 1 BASIC MENU 2/2 . E)TEST TONE ■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Note Set any THX speakers to SML (small). LFE/Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers according to the characteristics of your system. This setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH THX recommendation: SWFR LFE/BASS OUT [SWFR FRONT BOTH • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. • Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front speakers according to the speaker settings (even if you have previously set front speakers to SMALL). • Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want to output low-frequency signals from front channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and lowfrequency signals from other channels are also directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs. 78 [SMALL LARGE p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p . A)SPEAKERSET B)SPLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)THX SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter FRONT SP • Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT. • Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG CENTER SP NONE [SML LRG • Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. • Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT. • Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. Surround L/R speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. L/R SP NONE [SML LRG • Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 43) and automatically set SB L/R SP to NONE. • Select SML if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/ BASS OUT. • Select LRG if you have large surround left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the surround speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. MANUAL SETUP Surround back speakers SB L/R SP Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE SB L/R SP Bass cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz THX recommendation: 80Hz SMLx1 [SMLx2 CROSS OVER • Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the left surround back speaker. • Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT. • Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the left surround back speaker. • Select NONE if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. FREQ;;;80Hz(THX) Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your subwoofer. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE • Select NORMAL not to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. SUBWOOFER PHASE [NORMAL REVERSE Notes • If you select LRGx1 or SMLx1, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. • NONE is automatically selected if BI-AMP is set to ON (see page 91). This affects settings for SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE. PRIORITY PRESENCE SP PRNS [NONE [SB YES • Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers. • Select YES if you have presence speakers and want to use them. • Select PRNS to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select SB to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. 79 ADVANCED OPERATION Presence speakers PRESENCE SP Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers connected to this unit. Choices: NONE, YES Priority PRIORITY Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker set when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRNS, SB MANUAL SETUP ■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left (or surround left) speaker and each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 78). Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB B)SP LEVEL . FR.L FR.R CENT. ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds arrive at the listening position at the same time. + C)SP DISTANCE . UNIT;;;;;;;;feet FRONTL;;;10.0ft FRONTR;;;10.0ft CENTER;;;;10.0ft • • • • • • y If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. Notes • CENT. cannot be adjusted if CENTER SP is set to NONE (see page 78). • SUR. L and SUR. R cannot be adjusted if SB L/R SP is set to NONE (see page 79). • SB L and SB R can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx2 or SMLx2 (see page 79). • SB can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 79). • SWFR cannot be adjusted if LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT (see page 78). • PR. L and PR. R cannot be adjusted if PRESENCE SP is set to NONE (see page 79). 80 []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p • FR. L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker. FR. R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker. CENT. adjusts the balance of the center speaker. SUR. L adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker. SUR. R adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker. SB L adjusts the balance of the surround back left speaker. SB R adjusts the balance of the surround back right speaker. SB adjusts the balance of the surround back speakers. SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer. PR. L adjusts the balance of the presence left speaker. PR. R adjusts the balance of the presence right speaker. p • • • • p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) • Select meters to input speaker distances in meters. • Select feet to input speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.0 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. • SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. • SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. • SB L adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. • SB R adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. • SB adjusts the distance of the surround back speakers. • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. • PRNS L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. • PRNS R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. Notes • CENTER cannot be adjusted if CENTER SP is set to NONE (see page 78). • SUR. L and SUR. R cannot be adjusted if SB L/R SP is set to NONE (see page 79). • SB L and SB R can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx2 or SMLx2 (see page 79). • SB can be adjusted only if SB L/R SP is set to either LRGx1 or SMLx1 (see page 79). • SWFR cannot be adjusted if LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT (see page 78). • PRNS L and PRNS R cannot be adjusted if PRESENCE SP is set to NONE (see page 79). MANUAL SETUP ■ THX set D)THX SET Use to manually adjust the THX settings. D)THX SET SB DIST. 0.3-1.2m [<]/[>]:Adjust Using SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32). 2 SOUND MENU 1/2 Equalizer select SELECT Choices: AUTO PEQ, GEQ, EQ OFF A)EQUALIZER . SELECT....GEQ [<]/[>]:Adjust [ENTER]:Enter • Select AUTO PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in AUTO SETUP (see page 32). • Select GEQ to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic equalizer. • Select EQ OFF to completely deactivate both PEQ and GEQ. Notes • If GEQ is selected, the OSD automatically changes to the graphic equalizer screen as shown below. • AUTO PEQ is automatically selected if you run AUTO SETUP (see page 32). Graphic equalizer GEQ Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R and surround back L/R, surround back and presence L/R speakers with that of the front L/R speakers. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB) A)EQUALIZER p p . CHANNEL;;FRONT L + 63Hz 0.0dB 160Hz 0.0dB 400Hz 0.0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz Note The GEQ parameter can be adjusted only if GEQ is selected in SELECT. 81 ADVANCED OPERATION • This function is automatically turned off if you exit BASIC MENU. • If you select ON and enter the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL or SP DISTANCE menu, the test tone is output from the selected speakers. p Notes p y If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arm’s length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. p [<]/[>]:Select []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic equalizer (GEQ). Turns the test tone output on or off for the SPEAKER SET, SP LEVEL and SP DISTANCE settings. Choices: ON, OFF E)TEST TONE . E)HDMI SET ■ Graphic equalizer A)EQUALIZER ■ Test tone E)TEST TONE TEST TONE;;;;OFF 2 SOUND MENU 2/2 . A)EQUALIZER B)LFE LEVEL C)DYNAMIC RANGE D)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Surround back speaker distance SB DIST. Use this feature to optimize the surround sound field when you have to place the surround back L/R speakers apart. Choices: under 0.3m, 0.3 – 1.2m, over 1.2m (under 1ft, 1 – 4ft, over 4ft) • Select under 0.3m (under 1ft) if the distance between the surround back L/R speakers is less than 0.3 m (1 ft). • Select 0.3 – 1.2m (1 – 4ft) if the distance between the surround back L/R speakers is between 0.3 and 1.2 m (between 1 and 4 ft). • Select over 1.2m (over 4ft) if the distance between the surround back L/R speakers is more than 1.2 m (4 ft). MANUAL SETUP Test tone TEST Turns the test tone output on or off to compare the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R, surround back L/R, surround back and presence L/R speakers with that of the front L/R speakers. Choices: ON, OFF ■ Audio set D)AUDIO SET Use to customize the overall audio settings for this unit. D)AUDIO SET ■ Low-frequency effect level B)LFE LEVEL Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 (dB) B)LFE LEVEL . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker LFE level SPEAKER Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone LFE level HEADPHONE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. p p . MUTE TYPE;;;FULL A.DELAY;;;;;;0ms TONE BYPASS;AUTO LE>E []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Muting type MUTE TYPE Use to adjust how much the muting function reduces the sound output. Choices: FULL, –20 dB • Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio Delay A.DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 240 (ms) Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use to automatically bypass the tone control when BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select AUTO to automatically bypass the tone control when BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB. • Select OFF not to bypass the tone control at any time. Note ■ HDMI set E)HDMI SET Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack. Use to adjust the HDMI support audio. ■ Dynamic range C)DYNAMIC RANGE Use to select the amount of dynamic range to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) C)DYNAMIC RANGE . SP: MIN STD[MAX HP: MIN STD[MAX p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SP Select to adjust the dynamic range of speakers. Headphone HP Select to adjust the dynamic range of headphones. • Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. 82 E)HDMI SET SUPPORT AUDIO: RX-V1600 [<]/[>]:Adjust Support audio SUPPORT AUDIO Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Choices: RX-V1600, OTHER • Select RX-V1600 to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. • Select OTHER to play back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component. Note The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. MANUAL SETUP Using INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs. 3 INPUT MENU 1/2 3 INPUT MENU 2/2 . E)MULTI CH SET OPTICAL IN 1/2 . (4);;;;; ( (5);;;;; ( (6);;;;; ( CD CD DVD DVD DTV DTV OPTICAL IN 2/2 ) . (7);;;;;CBL/SAT (CBL/SAT) ) ) p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p p . A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUT RENAME C)VOLUME TRIM D)DECODER MODE []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Optical input OPTICAL IN Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. Note The default settings are displayed with parentheses in the OSD. Component video input CMPNT-V INPUT Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX CMPNT-V INPUT Optical output OPTICAL OUT Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX OPTICAL OUT . (8);;;;;MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE) (9);;;;; CD-R ( CD-R ) HDMI input HDMI IN Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX HDMI IN . IN1;;;;; DVD ( DVD ) IN2;;;;;CBL/SAT (CBL/SAT) . [A];;;;; DVD ( DVD ) [B];;;;; DTV ( DTV ) [C];;;;;CBL/SAT (CBL/SAT) ADVANCED OPERATION Coaxial input COAXIAL IN Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX COAXIAL IN . (1);;;;; CD ( CD ) (2);;;;; DVD ( DVD ) (3);;;;;DVR/VCR2 (DVR/VCR2) Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. 83 MANUAL SETUP ■ Input rename B)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the OSD and front panel display. B)INPUT RENAME DVD -> ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE Use to switch the input mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.). Choices: AUTO, DTS DVD D)DECODER MODE . p p p 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 3 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 4 Press k / n to select the character you want to use and l / h to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, space, 0 to 9, space, a to z, space, #, *, +, etc. 5 ■ Multi CH Setup E)MULTI CH SET Use to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you input 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. E)MULTI CH SET . INPUT CH;;;;;6CH FRONT;;;;;;;;DVD Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each input. C)VOLUME TRIM . p p PHONO 0.0dB CD 0.0dB CD-R 0.0dB MD/TAPE 0.0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Note You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using this setting. []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p Press ENTER or RETURN on the remote control to exit from the INPUT RENAME menu. ■ Volume trim C)VOLUME TRIM Use to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB 84 • Select AUTO if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select DTS if you want this unit to select DTS as the input mode. p 6 p CD ;;;;AUTO DVD ;;;;AUTO DTV ;;;;AUTO CBL/SAT ;;;;AUTO []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust [<]/[>]:Position []/[]:Chara. INPUT CH Use this setting to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6CH, 8CH • Select 6CH if you input 6-channel signals. • Select 8CH if you input 8-channel signals. Note If ZONE2 AMP is set to SUR, PRNS or BOTH (see page 87), no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select 8CH. In this case, select 6CH and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels. FRONT If you selected 8ch in INPUT CH, you can select analog jacks at which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX MANUAL SETUP Using OPTION MENU Use to manually adjust the optional system settings. 4 OPTION MENU 1/2 4 OPTION MENU 2/2 . E)PARAM. INI F)ZONE SET G)XM RADIO SET p p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p . A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORY GUARD C)AUDIO SELECT D)DECODER MODE []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET Use this feature to adjust the display settings. Video conversion V CONV. Use this feature to activate or deactivate the component interlace/progressive conversion as well as the HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to activate the component interlace/ progressive conversion as well as the HDMI interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. • Select OFF to deactivate the component interlace/ progressive conversion as well as the HDMI interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. y Note The parameter settings for DISPLAY SET (except for the DIMMER setting) can be initialized to the factory presets. Use the V-RESET feature in the ADVANCED SETUP menu (see page 91). A)DISPLAY SET p p . DIMMER;;;;;;;0 OSD SHIFT;;;;0 GRAY BACK;AUTO V CONV.;;;;;ON []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) Initial setting: 0 • Press h to lower the position of the OSD. • Press l to raise the position of the OSD. Notes • The OSD is not displayed when V CONV. is set to OFF. • Even when V CONV. is set to ON, HDMI digital signals are not converted to analog video signals. • If V CONV. is set to OFF, the CMPNT I/P and HDMI I/P features are deactivated. • Converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (composite or S-video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video, S-video or component video jacks cannot be converted even if V CONV. is set to ON. • If unconventional signals are being input at the composite video, S-video or component video jacks, the video output may be abnormal as a result. In such cases, set V CONV. to OFF. Component interlace/progressive conversion CMPNT I/P Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog I/P conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i to 480p are output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to activate the analog I/P conversion of the analog video signals. • Select OFF to deactivate the analog I/P conversion of the analog video signals. Notes • This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the OSD if V CONV. is set to OFF. • If your video monitor does not support the analog video signals with 480p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be displayed on your video monitor when CMPNT I/P is set to ON. 85 ADVANCED OPERATION Gray back GRAY BACK Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select AUTO to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. • Select OFF not to display a gray background even when there is no video signal being input. When using the THX system, we recommend setting V CONV. to OFF. MANUAL SETUP HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion HDMI I/P Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI I/P upconversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i to 480p are output at the HDMI OUT jack. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to activate the HDMI I/P up-conversion of the analog video signals. • Select OFF to deactivate the HDMI I/P up-conversion of the analog video signals. ■ Audio select C)AUDIO SELECT Notes • Select AUTO if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected input source. • This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the OSD if V CONV. is set to OFF. • When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the picture quality may worsen. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: ON, OFF B)MEMORY GUARD [ON OFF [<]/[>]:Adjust Use this feature to designate the default input mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST C)AUDIO SELECT [AUTO [<]/[>]:Adjust Note Selecting LAST does not recall the last setting for the EXTD SUR. button. ■ Decoder mode D)DECODER MODE Use this feature to designate the default decoder mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. See page 43 for details about the input mode. Choices: AUTO, LAST D)DECODER MODE • Select ON to protect the following system parameters. – DSP program parameters – All SET MENU items except MEMORY GUARD – All speaker levels – The on-screen display (OSD) mode • Select OFF to deactivate the memory guard feature. Notes • When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone or select any other SET MENU items. • When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, “MEMORY GUARD!” appears in the OSD and in the front panel display when you try to adjust the protected system parameters. LAST [AUTO LAST [<]/[>]:Adjust • Select AUTO to if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate decoder mode. • Select LAST to if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder mode used for the connected input source. Note Selecting LAST does not recall the last setting for the EXTD SUR. button. 86 MANUAL SETUP ■ Parameter initialization E)PARAM. INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) next to a program name means that the parameter values have been changed from their initial settings. E)PARAM. INI STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER *SURROUND PRESS DSP KEY Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY GUARD is set to ON. ■ Zone set F)ZONE SET F)ZONE SET p p SP B;;;;;;;;MAIN ZONE2 VOL;;;;VAR ZONE3 VOL;;;;VAR ZONE2 AMP;;;;EXT []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Notes • If you select ZONE B and connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Zone 3 volume ZONE3 VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: VAR, FIX • Select VAR to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote control. • Select FIX to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified. Choices: EXT, SUR, PRNS, BOTH • Select EXT if you want to connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifier connected to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. • Select SUR to use the internal surround amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select PRNS to use the internal surround back amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select BOTH to use the internal surround and surround back amplifiers of this unit if you want to connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to both the PRESENCE/ ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. Notes • If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu, SUR, PRNS and BOTH cannot be selected. • Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same time. If BOTH is selected for ZONE2 AMP, for instance, only EXT can be selected for ZONE3 AMP and vice versa. • The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes in effect in the following cases so that the surround and surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the 7.1-channel system. – When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to PRNS and EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off – When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to EXT and PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off • If either ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP is set to SUR or PRNS, the speaker system of the main room is limited to 3.1 or 2.1-channel playback no matter when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned off because the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals are used for the zone connection. 87 ADVANCED OPERATION Speakers B SP B Use to specify the location of speakers connected the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: MAIN, ZONE B • Select MAIN to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Zone 2 volume ZONE2 VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: VAR, FIX • Select VAR to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume simultaneously with VOLUME +/– on the remote control. • Select FIX to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. MANUAL SETUP G)XM RADIO SET . XM DISPLAY;;;10S XM ANTENNA;;NONE []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p Notes • If BI-AMP is set to ON in the ADVANCED SETUP menu, SUR, PRNS and BOTH cannot be selected. • Zone 2 and Zone 3 cannot use the same amplifier at the same time. If BOTH is selected for ZONE2 AMP, for instance, only EXT can be selected for ZONE3 AMP and vice versa. • The Intelligent Power AMP Assign feature of this unit becomes in effect in the following cases so that the surround and surround back amplifiers of this unit are automatically assigned to the main room for the use of the surround back speakers connected to the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals in the 7.1-channel system. – When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to PRNS and EXT respectively and Zone 2 is turned off – When ZONE2 AMP and ZONE3 AMP are set to EXT and PRNS respectively and Zone 3 is turned off • If either ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP is set to SUR or PRNS, the speaker system of the main room is limited to 3.1 or 2.1-channel playback no matter when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned off because the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals are used for the zone connection. ■ XM Satellite Radio set G)XM RADIO SET Use this feature to adjust the XM Satellite Radio settings. p Zone 3 amplifier ZONE3 AMP Use to select how the ZONE 3 speakers will be amplified. Choices: EXT, SUR, PRNS, BOTH • Select EXT if you want to connect your Zone 3 speakers through an external amplifier connected to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. • Select SUR to use the internal surround amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone 3 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select PRNS to use the internal surround back amplifier of this unit if you want to connect your Zone 3 speakers directly to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select BOTH to use the internal surround and surround back amplifiers of this unit if you want to connect your Zone 3 speakers directly to both the PRESENCE/ ZONE 2(3) and the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. Display DISPLAY Use this feature if you want to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD for a certain amount of time. Choices: ON, 10S, 30S, OFF • Select ON to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD. • Select 10S to set the amount of time for the XM Satellite Radio information to be displayed for 10 seconds. • Select 30S to set the amount of time for the XM Satellite Radio information to be displayed for 30 seconds. • Select OFF not to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD. Antenna ANTENNA Use this feature if you want to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% • If the displayed percentage of the reception level is below the average (approximately 60%), you need to adjust the orientation of the XM Satellite Radio antenna for a better percentage of the reception level. • If NONE is displayed, the XM Satellite Radio antenna may not be firmly connected to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. Check the XM Satellite Radio connection. Note The ANTENNA parameter cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the XM Satellite Radio antenna for a better percentage of the reception level. 88 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS You can switch between the available OSD modes and manually adjust the output level of each speaker. Selecting the OSD mode You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is to read the information in the front panel display. Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit and then press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the OSD mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: Full display → Short display → Display off Adjusting speaker levels You can manually adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in AUTO SETUP (see page 32) and SP LEVEL (see page 80). AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE Full display 2 – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE TV 1 PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER ON SCREEN DISPLAY A-E/CAT. Short display ON SCREEN RETURN STRAIGHT 3 DISPLAY EFFECT XM MEMORY (U.S.A. model) Display off Full display Fully shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. 1 AMP SOURCE Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;31ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Full display MUSIC Pop/Rock Short display Notes • The OSD signal is not output at the OUT (REC) jack and will not be recorded. • You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input by setting GRAY BACK to AUTO (see page 85). • The OSD is not displayed in the following cases: – When video signals in the progressive format or HDTV video signals are being input. – When the signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are being output at the HDMI OUT jack. – When V CONV. is set to OFF (see page 85). TV 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. LEVEL TITLE ADVANCED OPERATION Display off Only the operations performed using ON SCREEN on the remote control are displayed. However, the OSD is displayed when using SET MENU or the test tone feature even if the OSD mode is turned off. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. BAND FRONT L adjusts the front left speaker level. CENTER adjusts the center speaker level. FRONT R adjusts the front right speaker level. SUR.R adjusts the surround right speaker level. SB R adjusts the surround back right speaker level. SB L adjusts the surround back left speaker level. SUR.L adjusts the surround left speaker level. SWFR adjusts the subwoofer level. PRNS L adjusts the presence left speaker level. PRNS R adjusts the presence right speaker level. 3 Press l / h to adjust the speaker output level. Control range: +10 dB to –10 dB 89 ADVANCED SETUP ADVANCED SETUP This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The ADVANCED SETUP menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Using ADVANCED SETUP 1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. 4 STRAIGHT EFFECT 5 MASTER ON 2 OFF Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on the power of this unit. MASTER STRAIGHT ON EFFECT 3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to change the setting. Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and set this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. MASTER ON OFF y The new setting is activated next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on the power of this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3. OFF Notes Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See pages 90 and 91 for a complete list of available parameters. • The control buttons on the remote control and VOLUME as well as the other control buttons on the front panel except MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM selector are ineffective while you are using the ADVANCED SETUP menu. • Zone 2, Zone 3 and the speaker relay are all turned off and all audio and video output is muted while you are using the ADVANCED SETUP menu. • The ADVANCED SETUP menu is only available in the front panel display. ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. PROGRAM Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN • Select 6ΩMIN for speakers with 6 ohms or higher. • Select 8ΩMIN for speakers with 8 ohms or higher. ADVANCED SETUP SP IMP.-8 MIN Name of the selected parameter Current setting ■ User preset PRESET Use to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings with the exception of System Memory and AUTO SETUP settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select CANCEL if you do not want to reset the parameters of this unit. • Select RESET to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting does not affect the ADVANCED SETUP menu item parameters. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on the power of this unit. 90 ADVANCED SETUP ■ Remote sensor REMOTE SEN Use to activate or deactivate the signal-receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel of this unit. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON if you want to activate the signal-receiving capability of the remote control sensor. • Select OFF if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. ■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM (U.S.A. model only) Note Note We recommend setting this parameter to ON in most cases. You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the remote control. ■ Wake on RS-232C access WAKE ON 232C Use to switch the XM-related remote control codes between ID1 and ID2. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select ID1 when the remote control XM library code is set to 2604. • Select ID2 when the remote control XM library code is set to 2605. Use to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode. Choices: Y (yes), N (no) • Select Y set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. • Select N set this unit not to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. ■ Fan operation mode FAN MODE ■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP ■ Tuner frequency step TU (Asia and General models only) Use to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 95). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select ID1 when the remote control AMP library code is set to 2001. • Select ID2 when the remote control AMP library code is set to 2002. Use to set the operation of the cooling fan of this unit. Choices: AUTO, CONT. • Select AUTO to set the fan to operate automatically according to the temperature of this unit. • Select CONT. to set the fan to operate continuously regardless of the temperature of this unit. Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select AM10/FM100 for North, Central and South America. • Select AM9/FM50 for all other areas. Note ■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the remote control. Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON if you want to activate the bi-AMP function. • Select OFF if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP function. ■ Remote control tuner ID REMOTE TUN When BI-AMP is set to ON, the SURROUND BACK terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP connection (see page 19). Note ■ Video reset V-RESET You need to set the corresponding remote control code for the remote control. Use to initialize the parameter settings for DISPLAY SET in OPTION MENU (see page 85). This feature is useful if the SET MENU items are not displayed on your video monitor due to a technical error between the CMPNT I/P setting and the capability of your video monitor. That is, if your video monitor does not support the analog video signals with 480p of resolution, the SET MENU items may not be displayed on your video monitor when CMPNT I/P is set to ON (see page 85). Choices: YES, CANCEL Note Note The parameter setting for DIMMER is not initialized (see page 85). 91 ADVANCED OPERATION Use to set the tuner ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 95). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select ID1 when the remote control tuner library code is set to 2602. • Select ID2 when the remote control tuner library code is set to 2603. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. POWER POWER POWER STANDBY TV AV A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Display window SELECT AMP AMP/SOURCE/ TV Set to AMP to operate this unit. + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE TV The buttons inside the dotted lines control this unit in any mode (POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, AUDIO SEL, the input selector buttons, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and PURE DIRECT). The A and input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...Tape deck POWER POWER TV AV A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP POWER POWER MULTI AV CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE TVCD CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD PURE DIRECT SELECT NIGHT AMP AUDIO ENTER + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT SOURCE A-E/CAT. ON SCREEN RETURN STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT XM MEMORY STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON PRESET ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START + MUTE TV VOL EXIT MENU BAND PRG SELECT CH PURE DIRECT – TITLE – TV MUTE Display window A SPEAKERS B +10 TV + TOP ENTER TVNIGHT INPUT AUDIO PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU A/B/C/D/E TITLE MENU STRAIGHT SRCH MODE BAND RETURN DISPLAY NIGHT REC EFFECT ENTER STEREO DISC SKIP OFF SELECT k / n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. POWER STANDBY ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME (U.S.A. model) Component control area You can control up to 14 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 94). 1 MUSIC 2 ENTERTAIN 3 STANDARD RETURN SELECT THX 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON REC 4 ON SCREEN EXTD. SUR DISPLAY XM MEMORY 7 STEREO AUDIO MOVIE A-E/CAT. 8 MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 A SPEAKERS2 B ENT. +10 MOVIE 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 MODE PTY SEEK START A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. AMP/ SOURCE/ TV Set to SOURCE to operate the component selected with an input selector button. Set to TV to operate the television (you must set the remote control code in DTV or PHONO). DISC SKIP FREQ/RDS OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR EON MODE PTY SEEK START RE–NAME REC DISC SKIP (U.S.A. model) ■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area) OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window. Note You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 96 to program buttons operated within this component control area. 92 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling each component Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE POWER POWER TV AV A XM STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP TV MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 NIGHT A-E/CAT. RETURN + DISPLAY EFFECT XM MEMORY STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 EXTD SUR. THX STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON AMP + STRAIGHT ON SCREEN 8 SELECT AUDIO ENTER 7 DVD PURE DIRECT MENU SRCH MODE BAND 6 TV + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE 4 LEVEL TV INPUT 9 TV +10 ENT. SET MENU MENU BAND SRCH MODE B MODE PTY SEEK START REC MUTE PRESET/CH TITLE A 8 A SPEAKERS B SOURCE 3 0 DISC SKIP PURE DIRECT NIGHT OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 5 AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT (U.S.A. model) RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 A B *1 *2 *3 ENTERTAIN MOVIE DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder Cable TV/ TV Satellite tuner LD player CD player MD recorder/ CD recorder Tape deck Tuner AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 Power *1 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV VOL + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV VOL – TV volume – *2 *2 Volume – TV volume – *2 *2 *2 *2 TV volume – *2 CH + TV channel + *2 Channel + Channel + Channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 CH – TV channel – *2 Channel – Channel – Channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV INPUT TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV MUTE TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 Mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TITLE Title Title Title Title MENU Menu Menu Menu ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select k Menu up Menu up Menu up Preset up (1 to 8) n Menu down Menu down Menu down Preset down (1 to 8) l Menu left Menu left Menu left Preset down (A to E) h Menu right Menu right Menu right RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward b Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Direction back a Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 VCR rec *3 Disc skip Rec Rec s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 VCR stop *3 Stop Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause VCR pause *3 VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Pause h Play Play VCR play *3 VCR play *3 Play Play Play Play AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display Display Display ENTER TV volume – TV volume + *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – TV volume – TV volume – Band Direction A/B Preset up (A to E) ADVANCED OPERATION 7 8 9 MUSIC Search backward Audio Enter Display Display Enter/recall Enter/ numeric button Display This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area. These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1. 93 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting remote control codes 3 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the selected component name (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. LEARN Remote control code default settings y Input area Library (component category) Default YAMAHA code A TAPE 2700 XM TUNER 2604 Notes PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER 2602 CD CD 2300 MULTI CH INPUT DVD 2102 V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD 2500 CD-R CD-R 2400 DTV TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807 DVD DVD 2102 Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 94 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD If you want to setup for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component. • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 4 If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner), L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR Notes • The tuner library (L;TUN) code is preset in the TUNER and XM buttons in order to operate this unit. The initial settings for the TUNER and XM buttons are 2602 and 2604 respectively. However, you can switch the tuner library code by entering one of the following codes if necessary. • The AMP library (L;AMP) code is preset to 2001 in order to operate this unit. However, you can switch the AMP library code by entering one of the following codes if necessary. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting remote control AMP codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP code for the component you want to use. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE and then change the remote control code settings. AMP library code (remote control setting) Function Remote control AMP ID Setting remote control XM codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control XM code for the component you want to use. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and press XM on the remote control to select XM as the input source and then change the remote control code settings. XM library code (this unit’s setting: see page 91) To operate this unit using 2001 the default code. ID1 (initial setting) To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 (initial setting) features (see page 104). 2002 To operate this unit using an alternative code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features (see page 104). 2604 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 2603 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 • You need to set the corresponding remote control XM ID (see page 91). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 5 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Note 0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set. 6 Remote control tuner ID (this unit’s setting: see page 91) Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. ID1 (initial setting) ID2 Notes • You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID (see page 91). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 7 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 7 MOVIE 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Press ENTER to set the number. OK appears in the display window if setting was successful. NG appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 95 ADVANCED OPERATION 2602 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. ID1 (initial setting) Notes Setting remote control tuner codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control tuner code for the component you want to use. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and press TUNER on the remote control to select TUNER as the input source and then change the remote control code settings. Function (this unit’s setting: see page 91) ID2 • You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID (see page 91). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. (remote control setting) To operate this unit using an alternative code. 2605 Notes Tuner library code Function (remote control setting) Remote control XM ID REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 8 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 9 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the remote control code is correct. POWER POWER TV AV A XM STANDBY POWER FREQ/RDS AUDIO SEL SLEEP EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP CD MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD PHONO TUNER V-AUX DTV OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME (U.S.A. model) Using LEARN You can program remote control codes from other remote controls. Use the LEARN feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 92). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Note This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control.) 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. y AMP If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. SOURCE TV Notes • ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the Learn feature (see “Using LEARN”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 2 Press an input selector button to select a source component. A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD (U.S.A. model) 3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. XM AV CD AUDIO SEL DVD CD-R MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER TV TUNER MD/TAPE STANDBY A DVR/VCR2 POWER PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV V-AUX SELECT (U.S.A. model) 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 96 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. LEARN and the selected component name (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window. 7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 5 Press the button for which you want to program the new function. LEARN appears in the display window. CD AUDIO SEL STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER AV XM POWER TUNER DVD CD-R TV A MD/TAPE POWER PHONO DVR/VCR2 AMP SELECT TV SOURCE VCR 1 + CBL/SAT – VOLUME DTV + V-AUX – CH AUDIO NIGHT PURE DIRECT – MUTE MENU SET MENU SRCH MODE EFFECT STRAIGHT + TV INPUT PRESET/CH ENTER DISPLAY ON SCREEN TV VOL TV MUTE TITLE LEVEL BAND A-E/CAT. RETURN XM MEMORY • ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, FULL may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. (U.S.A. model) 6 XM CD AUDIO SEL STANDBY DVD CD-R MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER AV TUNER MD/TAPE POWER A DVR/VCR2 TV PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV SELECT V-AUX ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until OK appears in the display window. NG appears in the display window if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. (U.S.A. model) y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5 and 6. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 5 and 6. 97 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using RE-NAME 5 You can change the name of the input source that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP 6 SOURCE TV 2 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press ENTER to set the new name. OK appears in the display window if renaming was successful. NG appears in the display window if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. y If you continuously want to rename another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming mode. RE-NAME (U.S.A. model) 3 Note Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press RE-NAME again. 4 Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. (Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.) PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. 98 ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using MACRO The MACRO feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The MACRO feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 100). Press a macro button CD To automatically transmit these signals in order POWER CD Macro buttons First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY — — POWER POWER (*1) POWER (CD area) (*2) TV A XM — — — — — — — PHONO PHONO TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN — V-AUX V-AUX — CBL/SAT — CBL/SAT — (*3) — (CD area) (*4) POWER MD/TAPE MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE area) (*4) (*1) CD-R DTV DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 ADVANCED OPERATION CD-R (CD-R area) (*4) — (VCR 1 area) (*4) (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4) DVD (DVD area) (*4) *1 You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.) *2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 94), you can turn on the power of your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO. *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. *4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that component (see page 96) or set a remote control code (see page 94). 99 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ MACRO operations ■ Programming MACRO operations Macro buttons (U.S.A. model) POWER POWER TV AV A XM STANDBY POWER FREQ/RDS AUDIO SEL EON MODE PTY SEEK START SLEEP REC PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME You can program your own macro and use the MACRO feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. Notes MACRO ON/OFF 1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. 2 Press a macro button. MACRO • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP Notes • When you have finished using the MACRO feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While the remote is carrying out a MACRO program, it will not accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. M;DVD) and the selected component name (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window. A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD (U.S.A. model) Note AGAIN appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 100 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, FULL appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. (U.S.A. model) POWER POWER STANDBY POWER AUDIO SEL SLEEP TV AV A XM PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 Using CLEAR You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and setup remote control codes. ■ Basic CLEAR operations 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. MCR 2: AV POWER AMP MCR 3: AUDIO SEL SOURCE 3 MULTI CH IN TV MCR 1: DVD 1 2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. CLEAR appears in the display window. Indicates the number of macro steps entered CLEAR Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. Flashes alternately so you can set the next step 3 Note L;CD Note Note ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet for more than one week. 4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. WAIT appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, C;OK appears in the display window. CLEAR y Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). Note L;ALL and FCTRY may take about 30 seconds to complete. 101 ADVANCED OPERATION Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. L;AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. L;ALL Clears all learned functions. M;ALL Clears all programmed macros. RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. To change the selected source component, press SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected component and corresponding component control area. 5 Press k / n to select the clear mode. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Release the object used to press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. 4 CLEAR Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was successful. (U.S.A. model) Notes FREQ/RDS • C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3. • ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 y • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • If you continuously want to clear another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. (U.S.A. model) 3 A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. LEARN and the selected component name (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window. LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 102 5 Release the object used to press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. 6 Press LEARN again to exit. Notes • C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. • ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a macro function You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. C;OK appears in the display window if clearing was successful. (U.S.A. model) DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME ADVANCED OPERATION y • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the macro programming mode. 5 Press MACRO again to exit. Notes • C;NG appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. • ERROR appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. 103 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. y • You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit. • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. REMOTE REMOTE IN Infrared signal receiver OUT REMOTE IN OUT OUT YAMAHA component YAMAHA component This unit REMOTE IN ■ Using the external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select EXT in ZONE2 AMP (see page 87). ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player (or other component) VIDEO IN AUDIO IN This unit MAIN SYSTEM Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver ZONE 2 ZONE 3 Infrared emitter Main room REMOTE OUT Second room Third room REMOTE IN REMOTE IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. • The REMOTE IN jack can be used for either Zone 2 or Zone 3 but cannot be used for both Zone 2 and Zone 3 at the same time. 104 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 ■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit If you want to use one internal amplifier (surround or surround back) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals and select either SUR or PRNS for ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP (see pages 87 and 88). If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both surround and surround back) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) and PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals and select BOTH for ZONE2 AMP or ZONE3 AMP (see pages 87 and 88). SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) R + – – + L R L + R + – – + L – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2(3) Third room SINGLE SURROUND BACK Second room This unit IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE SURROUND/ZONE 2(3) or PRESENCE/ZONE 2(3) speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3 You can select the zone you want to control by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. Once the zone you want to control is selected, you can control the selected zone as described in “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 106. 1 Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel to individually turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press each button repeatedly to turn on the respective zone or set it to the standby mode. Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. ZONE CONTROL Each time you press ZONE CONTROL, the front panel display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator flashes when this unit is selected. ZONE2 ZONE3 No indicator flashes when this unit is selected. ZONE ON/OFF ON/OFF ZONE 2 ZONE 3 y Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER and STANDBY on the remote control to turn on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously. ZONE2 Controls the Zone 2 component connected to the ZONE 2 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this unit. ZONE3 Controls the Zone 3 component connected to the ZONE 3 AUDIO L/R jacks on the rear panel of this unit. 105 ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Front panel operations 2 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 y • You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROL again. • The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on. 3 Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 106 for detailed information on the Zone 2 and Zone 3 control functions. ■ Remote control operations 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV on the remote control to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press SELECT k repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 is displayed in the display window. Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 Once the zone you want to control is selected as described in “Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 105, you can control Zone 2 and Zone 3 by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are listed as follows: • Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 • Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 • Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 • Tuning into FM or AM when TUNER is selected as the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 • Tuning into the XM Satellite Radio when XM is selected as the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 ■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Use the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source of the selected zone. If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2: name of the selected input source” or “3: name of the selected input source” is displayed in the display window when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected respectively. (U.S.A. model) A XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD INPUT SELECT or or 3 Proceed to “Controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3” for detailed information on the Zone 2 and Zone 3 control functions. 4 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. Notes • The input source of Zone 2 and the source available for recording are always the same. • ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 appears in the display window only when k is pressed, and ALL appears only when n is pressed. 106 • Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER features in the selected zone. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on page 46. • Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite Radio features in the selected zone. For details about the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 52. Note The selected input source is shared across all zones. y You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel again. ZONE 2/ZONE 3 ■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume level of the selected zone. Control range: –80 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB VOLUME + or VOLUME – Note Using the control mode of Zone 2 and Zone 3 POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work differently depending on the selected zone that appears in the display window. • When the normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn on this unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually. • When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns on this unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously and pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode simultaneously. Control mode VOLUME +/– can be used only when ZONE2 VOL or ZONE3 VOL is set to VAR in ZONE SET (see page 87). LCD display POWER and STANDBY Normal mode Name of component Turns on the main unit only or sets it to the standby mode. ■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Zone 2 mode “ZONE 2” or “2:name of the selected component” Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode. Press CH +/– and TV VOL +/– on the remote control to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) and the low-frequency response (BASS) respectively. Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB Control step: 2 dB Zone 3 mode “ZONE 3” or “3:name of the selected component” Turns on Zone 3 or sets it to the standby mode. “ALL” POWER: turns on the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3. STANDBY: sets the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. y Press MUTE to mute the sound output to the selected zone. All mode + + CH TV VOL – – Note Note In the normal mode, MAIN appears for a few seconds when POWER or STANDBY is pressed. ADVANCED OPERATION Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality of the corresponding zone (see page 106). y You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting the tonal quality” on page 38. 107 HDMI HDMI What is HDMI? HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/ video) interface. Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television – DTV), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI 1.1 (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.1) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • This unit is not compatible with multi-stereo area audio signals of Super Audio CDs. You can connect devices (such as a DVD player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. • When connected to a DVD player, audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. In case the DVD player connected to this unit does not output DVD multichannel audio signals at the HDMI OUT jack, connect the DVD player to the analog multi-channel audio input jacks. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio plays back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • Video and audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is set to the standby mode or the power is turned off. • When connecting other HDMI components to this unit, refer to the instruction manuals for those components. • When HDMI audio signals are output from components like a DVD player, the audio signal format (such as sampling frequencies) may be restricted depending on the HDMI video signal format. • Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from this unit or turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly and HDCP ERROR appears in the front panel display as if the DVI monitors do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit Notes • Analog audio signals input at the audio input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack. However, analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be up-converted to HDMI so that the digitally up-converted video signals can be output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 86). • Connect the HDMI OUT jack of other components (such as a DVD player) to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit. Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of other components (such as a projector). • You need a commercially available HDMI cable to connect this unit to other HDMI components. Use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (15 ft) to ensure stable operations and to prevent losses of video quality. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks. 108 Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. HDMI Setting the HDMI parameters ■ Assigning HDMI components You can assign an HDMI component to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack on the rear panel of this unit so that the audio and video signals input via HDMI connection can be simultaneously played back. Use the HDMI IN parameter in INPUT MENU to assign HDMI components (see page 83). ■ Converting analog video signals to HDMI Basic HDMI operations Perform the following steps to listen to playback from an HDMI component. Note If an error message appears in the front panel display, see page 116 for a complete list of error messages and proper remedies. 1 This unit is equipped with the HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion feature where the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks on the rear panel of this unit are digitally processed and up-converted so that they can be output at the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit with alldigital resolution quality. Use the HDMI I/P parameter in OPTION MENU to convert analog component video signals to HDMI (see page 86). Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source assigned to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack on the rear panel of this unit. (U.S.A. model) XM AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD INPUT or Note When the analog video signals with 1080i or 720p of resolution are up-converted to HDMI and output at the HDMI OUT jack, the picture quality may worsen. A Front panel 2 ■ Setting the HDMI support audio You can choose to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Use the HDMI SET parameter in SOUND MENU to set the HDMI support audio (see page 82). Remote control Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel or AUDIO SEL on the remote control repeatedly to select AUTO or HDMI as the input mode. The following front panel displays are examples where DVD is selected as the input source. AUDIO SEL AUDIO SELECT Front panel DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD INPUT: A.SEL: SP A MD/TAPE CD-R CD DVD AUTO PHONO TUNER XM dB VOLUME L R or V-AUX SP A 3 DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV INPUT: A.SEL: DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DVD HDMI CD PHONO TUNER XM dB VOLUME L R Start playback on the connected HDMI component. 109 ADVANCED OPERATION V-AUX Remote control TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound No picture Cause See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 31 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 15 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 20–28 The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. The input mode is set to HDMI, COAX/ OPT or ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons on the remote control. 36 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 15 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). 36 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 38 The input mode is set to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT. The signals this unit cannot reproduce (a CD-ROM, for example) are being received from a source component. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. — SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and HDMI audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set SUPPORT AUDIO to RX-V1600 in MANUAL SETUP. 82 V CONV. is set to OFF. Set V CONV. to ON. 85 Video signals in the progressive format or HDTV video signals are being input. The signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are being output at the HDMI OUT jack. 110 Remedy — — 43 43 — TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Cause The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy See page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 31 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 38 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 20 Incorrect balance settings in the OSD menu. Adjust the SP LEVEL settings. 80 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on. You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. CENTER SP is set to NONE in SPEAKER SET. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. SUR. L/R SP is set to NONE in SPEAKER SET. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 78 A monaural or stereo source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select SB in PRIORITY. 79 SUR. L/R SP is set to NONE in SPEAKER SET. If the surround left and right speakers are set to NONE, surround back speakers are automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 78 SB L/R SP is set to NONE in SPEAKER SET. Select SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1 or LRGx2. LFE/BASS OUT is set to FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. LFE/BASS OUT is set to SWFR or FRONT when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. No sound from the center speaker No sound from the surround speakers No sound from the surround back speakers 36 80 78 36 80 79 78 78 The source does not contain low bass signals. 111 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No sound from the subwoofer 42 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy See page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or COAX/OPT. A humming sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 27 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. MEMORY GUARD is set to ON. This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. CHECK SP WIRES appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. There is noise interference from digital or radiofrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or radio-frequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. 112 — 43 27 — Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 20–27 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 20–27 Select OFF. 86 — 15 Move this unit further away from such equipment. — Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Remedy See page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 29 Use the manual tuning method. 47 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. — 29 47 47 — — ■ XM Satellite Radio If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page The XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory is not connected, or does not work properly. Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connections. 52 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Check the XM Connect-and-Play digital antenna accessory connections and orient it for the best reception. 52 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. Wait until the decoding process has finished. — OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signal. Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. 56 <XM> - - - The channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. --- / --- No artist name/feature or song/program title is available. <CAT> - - - No channels are available for the selected category. Select another channel category by pressing CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly. 56 113 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CHECK ANTENNA TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Wrong distance or angle. 114 See page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 5 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4 AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 94 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 94 The remote control code was not correctly set. The remote control does not learn new functions. Remedy Cause — The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 91, 94 96 4 96 — 101 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ AUTO SETUP Before AUTO SETUP Error message Cause Remedy See page Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 32 Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — During AUTO SETUP Error message E-1:NO FRONT SP Cause Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. Remedy See page Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B. — Check the front L/R speaker connections. 15 E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 15 E-3:NO PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 15 E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. 15 Try running AUTO SETUP in a quiet environment. — E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. Connect surround speakers when you use (a) surround back speaker(s). 15 E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 32 The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 32 E-8:NO SIGNAL Check the speaker connections and placement. 15 E-9:USER CANCEL The AUTO SETUP procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run AUTO SETUP again. 32 E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run AUTO SETUP again. 32 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 115 TROUBLESHOOTING After AUTO SETUP Warning message Cause Remedy See page W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). 15 W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) Check the speaker connections. 15 Use speakers of similar quality. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 33 Notes • • • • If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again. If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made. If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. ■ HDMI Error message Cause Remedy See page DEVICE OVER More than 5 HDMI components including this unit are connected. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP ERROR HDCP testing failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — 116 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio information ■ ASA (Advanced Speaker Array) ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room will provide the largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will re-optimized the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three new modes: THX Select2 Cinema, THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. It provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels. An additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with a previously unheard of excitement and realism. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. 96 refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). 24 refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering studios. ■ Dolby Pro Logic x ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Pro Logic x is a new technology enabling 6.1 or 7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. 117 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes that have flyover and flyaround effects. ■ Dolby Surround GLOSSARY ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation comparable to digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode for movies. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home theater, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theater environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theater environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX). 118 Adaptive decorrelation In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theater there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theater. Re-equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment. Timbre matching The human ear changes our perception of sound depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a movie theater, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theater, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The timbre matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. GLOSSARY Video information Sound field program information ■ Component video signal ■ CINEMA DSP With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, luminance and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 119 GLOSSARY Parametric equalizer information This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 81), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 120 Original frequency characteristic SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 120 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 155/195/250/330 W • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω .........................................................170 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................170 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω ..................................................................................... 1.03 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................125 W • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω .................................................. 140 or more • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Signal PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more • Output Level/Output Impedance OUT (REC) .......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT [U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ................................................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R ............................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................3.5 kHz • Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................450 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................1.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC [U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .......................... NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Input Level (V CONV. off) ................. 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (V CONV. off) ....................... 60 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component (V CONV. off) ................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf) • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB • Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to OUT (REC) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3% • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB • Frequency Response Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m 121 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ..................... 81 dB or more [Other models] ........................................................ 86 dB or more CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General and Asia model] ....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less [Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [Australia and U.K. models] .... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) [Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 435 x 171 x 438 mm (17.1 x 6.7 x 17.2 in) • Weight .................................................................. 17.4 kg (38.4 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 122 LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES CABLE ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 CD PLAYER AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER 0699 JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 KENWOOD 0517, 0561 KOSS 0678 LG 0768 LIMIT 0795 MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702 MARANTZ 0566 MEMOREX 0858 MICO 0750 MICROSOFT 0549 MINTEK 0744 MITSUBISHI 0548 MUSTEK 0757 NESA 0744 ONKYO 0530 ORITRON 0678 PALSONIC 0699 PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389 PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101, 2102 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER SHARP SONY TOSHIBA VICTOR YAMAHA 2800, 2801, 2802 2808 2804, 2805, 2806 2812, 2813 2809, 2810, 2811 2803 2814 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN YAMAHA 0091 0086 0091 0086 0086 0086 0086 0091 0086 0091 0228 0086 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 i CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER 1417 VICTOR 0101 WARDS 0041, 0185 YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358, 2600, 2601, 2602, 2603, 2604, 2605 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT ABSAT ALBA ALPHASTAR AMSTRAD ASTON ASTRO ATSAT AVALON ii 1327 0150 0482 0799 0874 0169, 1156 0200 1327 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH PACE 1127 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS 0056 PIONEER 0054 POLK AUDIO 0056 RCA 0054 REVOX 0056 SANSUI 0056 SONY 0270 THORENS 0056 WARDS 0054 YAMAHA 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 ASA 0131 AWA 0036 ACURA 0036 ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680 ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490 ADVENT 0788 AIKO 0119 AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 AKURA 0291 ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 CIMLINE 0036 CINERAL 0119, 0478 CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119 CLARION 0207 CLARIVOX 0064 CLATRONIC 0274, 0397 CONDOR 0347, 0397 CONRAC 0835 CONTEC CRAIG CROSLEY CROWN 0036, 0207 0207 0081 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI 0036, 0064 HISAWA 0482 HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 HUA TUN 0036 HUANYU 0401 HYPSON 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445 INDIANA 0064 INFINITY 0081 INGELEN 0190 INNO HIT 0543 INNOVA 0064 INTEQ 0044 INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064 MEGATRON 0172, 0205 MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 METZ 0474 MICROMAXX 0835 MICROSTAR 0835 MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078 MINERVA 0514 MINOKA 0439 MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 iii SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 SEMIVOX 0207 SEMP 0183 SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677 SHEN YING 0036, 0119 SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263 SIAREM 0543 SIEMENS 0064, 0222 SINUDYNE 0543 SKANTIC 0383 SKYGIANT 0207 SKYWORTH 0064 SOLAVOX 0190 SONITRON 0235 SONOKO 0036, 0064 SONOLOR 0190, 0235 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445 SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW 0198 STANDARD 0036 STARLITE 0207 STERN 0190, 0286 SUPREME 0027 SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198 SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207 SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 SYSLINE 0064 T+A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCI 0044 TVS 0490 TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205 TAI YI 0036 TANDY 0120, 0190 TASHIKO 0119, 0677 TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 TEC 0274 TECHNEMA 0347 TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677 TECHWOOD 0078 TECO 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER 0347 TELETECH 0036 TENSAI 0347 TERA 0057 THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 THORN 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH 0543 TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119 iv UHER 0347 UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0677, 0796, 0860, 2900 (projector), 2901 (projector), 2902, 2903 YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON 0062 CARVER 0108 CIMLINE 0099 CINERAL 0305 CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305 COLT 0099 COMBITECH 0379 CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI 0099 KENWOOD KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LG 0068, 0094 0062, 0064 0068, 0070 0099 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 MINOLTA 0069 MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN TENOSAL TENSAI THOMAS THOMSON 0068, 0347 0099 0027 0027 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 v RX-V1600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Friday, August 26, 2005 4:34 PM U RX-V1600 RX-V1600 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WF99900